WO2024067078A1 - Vehicle positioning method and electronic device - Google Patents

Vehicle positioning method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024067078A1
WO2024067078A1 PCT/CN2023/118393 CN2023118393W WO2024067078A1 WO 2024067078 A1 WO2024067078 A1 WO 2024067078A1 CN 2023118393 W CN2023118393 W CN 2023118393W WO 2024067078 A1 WO2024067078 A1 WO 2024067078A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
positioning
vehicle
information
walking
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/118393
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴谋炎
肖洋
黄国胜
金乐
史翔
李文懿
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024067078A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024067078A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/01Detecting movement of traffic to be counted or controlled
    • G08G1/042Detecting movement of traffic to be counted or controlled using inductive or magnetic detectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/09Arrangements for giving variable traffic instructions
    • G08G1/0962Arrangements for giving variable traffic instructions having an indicator mounted inside the vehicle, e.g. giving voice messages
    • G08G1/0968Systems involving transmission of navigation instructions to the vehicle
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/09Arrangements for giving variable traffic instructions
    • G08G1/0962Arrangements for giving variable traffic instructions having an indicator mounted inside the vehicle, e.g. giving voice messages
    • G08G1/0968Systems involving transmission of navigation instructions to the vehicle
    • G08G1/0969Systems involving transmission of navigation instructions to the vehicle having a display in the form of a map
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/123Traffic control systems for road vehicles indicating the position of vehicles, e.g. scheduled vehicles; Managing passenger vehicles circulating according to a fixed timetable, e.g. buses, trains, trams
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/14Traffic control systems for road vehicles indicating individual free spaces in parking areas
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02Services making use of location information
    • H04W4/024Guidance services
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/30Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes
    • H04W4/38Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes for collecting sensor information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/30Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes
    • H04W4/40Services specially adapted for particular environments, situations or purposes for vehicles, e.g. vehicle-to-pedestrians [V2P]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/26Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 specially adapted for navigation in a road network
    • G01C21/34Route searching; Route guidance

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular to a vehicle positioning method and electronic equipment.
  • the user parks the vehicle in an underground garage.
  • the garage area required for the same area also increases, especially for areas with high parking demand such as shopping malls, airports and railway stations.
  • the underground garage includes more parking spaces and more complicated driving routes, which makes it difficult for users to find the parked vehicle after parking. Therefore, it is necessary to obtain parking location information when entering the underground parking lot to facilitate finding the parked vehicle in the underground garage.
  • the vehicle can be positioned by the driver using a mobile phone (it should be noted that the driver and the mobile phone are in the same position by default).
  • the mobile phone's Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) positioning module usually cannot receive satellite signals and cannot locate the vehicle's position information through conventional positioning methods such as satellite positioning.
  • the mobile phone can obtain parking position information through vehicle dead reckoning (VDR) recursion based on the sensor data detected by the inertial measurement unit (IMU) sensor.
  • VDR vehicle dead reckoning
  • IMU inertial measurement unit
  • the obtained parking position information may be inaccurate, or even deviate greatly from the actual parking position information, making it impossible to find the parked vehicle through the obtained parking position information.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a vehicle positioning method and electronic device, which can obtain the parking position information by calculating based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the target vehicle and the accurate positioning information obtained with delay, when the parking position information cannot be obtained through conventional positioning technology, thereby improving the accuracy of obtaining the parking position information.
  • a vehicle positioning method which can be applied to an electronic device capable of acquiring posture data, such as a mobile phone, for a scenario where a target vehicle enters a parking area (such as an underground garage) that cannot be accurately located by conventional positioning technologies such as satellites.
  • an electronic device detects whether the target vehicle is in a parked state, and when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the walking posture data of the electronic device is obtained.
  • the target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device is obtained.
  • the parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
  • the first position is the position where the electronic device can be located for the first time using the preset positioning technology during the movement.
  • the first position that can be located for the first time may be different due to different walking routes of the user carrying the electronic device after leaving the target vehicle, different walking posture data obtained, or different preset positioning technologies used.
  • the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked in at least one of the following ways: detecting that the target vehicle is turned off in a preset manner, detecting that the target vehicle is stopped in the parking space, receiving a preset voice message (the preset voice message can be a voice message played by a reversing radar), etc.
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device is used as the travel-related data
  • the target positioning information that is, the position information corresponding to the position that the user can first locate using the preset positioning technology during walking
  • the initial position that is, the position where the electronic device leaves the vehicle, that is, the parking position of the target vehicle
  • the parking position information is obtained through reverse positioning and calculation.
  • the parking position of the target vehicle can be obtained when the parking position of the target vehicle cannot be located, and by ensuring that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is accurate, and the walking posture data of the electronic device is accurate, the accuracy of the parking position information can be improved.
  • the location information of the target vehicle in response to a user's triggering operation, is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, so that the user can be prompted with the location information of the target vehicle, so as to improve the user's perception of the location information of the target vehicle.
  • the parking location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the parking location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, so that a navigation path for finding the target vehicle is generated with the parking location information as the destination, thereby improving the speed of finding the target vehicle.
  • positioning indication information and reference position information of the target vehicle are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the positioning indication information is used to indicate that the parking position information of the target vehicle is being positioned, and the positioning indication information can be indicated in at least one of the following ways: prompt text, text prompt box, image prompt box, and prompt mark.
  • the vehicle positioning interface is set to be in the background running state, and the positioning indication information is displayed in a floating window until the parking location information is obtained.
  • a positioning prompt sound can also be played, such as locating the parking position of the vehicle for you.
  • the reference position information may be marked by a preset mark, and the preset mark may be a circle mark, a rectangle mark or a triangle mark that can cover a certain range.
  • the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the target vehicle parking information is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned.
  • Displaying the reference position information can mark the approximate position of the target vehicle, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
  • the reference position information of the target vehicle in the process of displaying the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface, the reference position information of the target vehicle may be first acquired. Then, the positioning indication information and the map information are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, the geographical range corresponding to the map information includes the reference position information of the target vehicle, and then the reference position information is marked on the map information according to a preset identifier.
  • the reference position information of the target vehicle includes any of the following items: estimated position information obtained based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data, the vehicle driving posture data including the driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain the parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the last position located by the user using the preset positioning technology before leaving the vehicle; or, the first range position information determined with the position corresponding to the estimated position information as the center and the preset deviation range as the radius; or, the second range position information determined with the second position as the center and the second preset deviation range as the radius.
  • the electronic device can determine the area range corresponding to the map information based on the reference location information, the zoom ratio, and the position of the current location in the map information. It is understandable that the electronic device can change the area range corresponding to the map information in response to user operations (such as dragging, zooming, etc.).
  • the electronic device can also display a navigation planning route, the origin of the navigation planning route is the initial position of the target vehicle to the current vehicle driving posture data, and the destination of the navigation planning route is the reference position information. Accordingly, in the process of determining the area range corresponding to the map information, the navigation planning route is also required as a basis so that the entire navigation planning route can be displayed in the map information.
  • the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the vehicle parking information of the target vehicle is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned.
  • the reference position information By marking the reference position information according to the preset mark based on the map information, the approximate position of the target vehicle can be marked, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
  • the vehicle positioning method further includes: when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, and when it is detected that the electronic device has left the target vehicle, acquiring the walking posture data of the electronic device. In this way, after the electronic device leaves the target vehicle, the walking posture data of the electronic device is acquired, which can reduce the amount of the walking posture data and improve the speed of obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  • the detecting that the electronic device leaves the target vehicle includes at least one of the following: detecting that the connection with the target vehicle changes from a connected state to a disconnected state; or receiving preset sensor information, and using the sensor information to detect that the connection with the target vehicle changes from a connected state to a disconnected state; to indicate that a seat belt of a user on the target vehicle changes from a worn state to an unfastened state; or, the detected walking posture data includes initial posture data and indicated posture data; wherein the initial posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, and the start time of the first time period is the time when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the difference between the indicated posture data and the initial posture data is greater than a first preset threshold.
  • the connection method between the electronic device and the target vehicle includes wireless connection methods such as Bluetooth, infrared, Wi-Fi hotspot, etc., and wired connection methods such as optical fiber, twisted pair, etc.
  • the preset sensing information can be pressure sensing information obtained by a pressure sensor.
  • the walking posture data obtained during the time period of staying in the vehicle (the time period spent by the user in the vehicle to organize the things he carries with him, dress himself, etc.) is determined as the initial posture data.
  • the indicated posture data refers to the posture data that is significantly different from the initial posture data.
  • the acquisition of the indicated posture data indicates that the user has left the target vehicle with the electronic device and started walking.
  • the electronic device can determine that the electronic device has left the target vehicle only when it is determined in at least two ways that the electronic device has left the target vehicle, thereby improving the accuracy of determining whether the electronic device has left the vehicle.
  • the above-mentioned acquisition of target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the electronic device during movement can be implemented in the following manner: if the electronic device leaves the target vehicle, then after a preset delay time, the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the electronic device during movement is acquired.
  • the preset delay time may be pre-set based on experience, or may be obtained in response to a user operation, or may be obtained through a preset acquisition method.
  • the preset acquisition method may include: after the target vehicle enters the underground garage, counting the length of time during which the preset positioning technology cannot be used for positioning, and then calculating the preset delay time for the electronic device to move to the edge of the underground garage or the wireless signal source based on the length of time, the driving posture data, and the size of the underground garage.
  • the first walking path is first displayed on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data of the electronic device.
  • the target positioning information of the first position is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, and the first position is on the first walking path.
  • the first walking path starts from the position indicated by the reference position information and extends in the walking direction of the electronic device, and the first walking path is gradually displayed as the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the vehicle increases.
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the vehicle can be detected by a sensor on the electronic device carried by the user when walking.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
  • the user can perform walking navigation according to the first walking path displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, or directly return to the target vehicle location according to the first walking path, thereby reducing the time required for the user to return to the target vehicle and improving the speed of finding the target vehicle.
  • Displaying the target positioning information on the vehicle positioning interface can determine the relative position of the target positioning information in the map information, so as to prompt the user's location.
  • the above-mentioned vehicle positioning method also includes: after obtaining target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device, displaying a second walking path on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information.
  • the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device.
  • the location information corresponding to the starting point of the second walking path is the vehicle parking information.
  • the user can intuitively perceive the parking position information of the target vehicle, the target positioning information, and the second walking path, which helps the user to enhance the sense of direction and improve the user's understanding of their location.
  • the vehicle positioning method further includes: during the movement of the electronic device, The walking process track of the electronic device is determined according to the walking posture data. On this basis, the first position is used as the end position of the walking process track to determine the starting position of the walking process track, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  • the calculation method of the walking process trajectory includes step frequency detection, step length estimation, heading estimation, etc., and the user's first walking path is calculated by recursion.
  • the walking process trajectory of the electronic device can be determined according to the walking posture data without using the preset positioning technology, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined by taking the first position as the end position of the walking trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be positioned by the preset positioning technology.
  • using the walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method is significantly reduced due to the performance constraints of the IMU of the electronic device, and it can even be used as a reference position for parking.
  • the vehicle positioning method further includes: when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the geomagnetic sequence data of the electronic device is obtained; and during the movement of the electronic device, the walking process trajectory of the electronic device is determined according to the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data. Then, a preset positioning technology is used to obtain the target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device, wherein the preset positioning technology at least includes geomagnetic matching technology. Finally, the first position is used as the end position of the walking process trajectory, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  • the walking process trajectory of the electronic device can be determined according to the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data without the need for a preset positioning technology, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined with the first position as the end position of the walking trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be positioned by the preset positioning technology.
  • the use of walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device is significantly reduced, and even cannot be used as a reference position for parking.
  • the accuracy of the walking process trajectory determined by adding the geomagnetic sequence data can be improved, and the accuracy of the target positioning information corresponding to the first position obtained by using the geomagnetic matching technology can also be improved.
  • the vehicle positioning interface displays the first walking path
  • the first walking path is obtained by the device movement parameters represented by the walking process trajectory, and the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends in the user's walking direction
  • the device movement parameters include the walking direction and the walking speed.
  • the consistency of the target positioning information, the vehicle parking information and the first walking path is ensured, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the obtained vehicle parking information.
  • the above-mentioned obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position includes: after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, determining the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data, until the starting position of the electronic device's movement is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  • the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position can be determined based on the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined.
  • the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  • the vehicle positioning method further includes: when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, obtaining geomagnetic sequence data of the electronic device. On this basis, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data, the trajectory position of the electronic device before moving to the first position is determined, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  • the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position can be determined according to the target positioning information, walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data corresponding to the first position, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined.
  • the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle, which can avoid the error caused by the IMU performance constraint of the electronic device through VDR inference.
  • the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the interruption method is significantly reduced, and it may even be unable to be used as a reference position for parking.
  • the second walking path when the vehicle positioning interface displays the second walking path, the second walking path includes a track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device.
  • a second walking path including a trajectory position is obtained based on the walking posture data, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device, that is, the trajectory position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information.
  • the trajectory position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information.
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position can also be obtained first.
  • the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position is obtained, wherein the third position is the position where the electronic device reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position after a preset distance.
  • the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position is corrected to obtain the correction compensation parameters.
  • the walking posture data is corrected and updated.
  • the updated parking position information is obtained. Finally, the updated parking position information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position are accurate, the target positioning information is used as the starting position and the correction positioning information is used as the ending position.
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position is corrected, and the correction compensation parameters are obtained.
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the vehicle (until the user arrives at the first position) can be corrected, thereby improving the accuracy of the acquired parking position information.
  • the above-mentioned acquisition of the parking position information of the target vehicle based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position can also be implemented in the following manner: First, the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position are acquired. Then, the walking posture data after the electronic device leaves the first position is acquired. Furthermore, the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position is acquired, and the third position is the position where the user reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position and passing a preset distance. Next, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, the walking posture data after the correction point device leaves the first position is corrected to acquire the correction compensation parameters. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, the walking posture data is corrected and updated. Finally, according to the updated walking posture data and the target positioning information, the parking position information is acquired.
  • the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position are accurate, the target positioning information is used as the starting position and the correction positioning information is used as the ending position.
  • the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position is corrected, and the correction compensation parameters are obtained.
  • the walking posture data of the electronic device (until the user arrives at the first position) can be corrected, thereby improving the accuracy of the obtained parking position information.
  • the vehicle positioning method further includes: after obtaining the parking position information according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information, in response to the user's vehicle search request, generating a navigation path with the parking position information as the target position and the current real-time positioning position as the starting position. It can be understood that the current real-time positioning position is obtained by positioning the electronic device through a preset positioning technology.
  • the preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology and geomagnetic matching technology.
  • the vehicle parking information can be obtained, which can improve the speed of obtaining the vehicle parking information.
  • the target positioning information corresponding to the first position can be determined by at least two preset positioning technologies, the accuracy of the obtained target positioning information can be improved, and thus the accuracy of obtaining the vehicle parking information can be improved.
  • a vehicle positioning device comprising a first processing unit, a second processing unit and a third processing unit.
  • the first processing unit is used to obtain walking posture data of the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained.
  • the second processing unit is used to obtain target positioning information corresponding to a first position of the electronic device during movement, where the first position is the position where the electronic device can be located for the first time using a preset positioning technology during movement.
  • the third processing unit It is used to obtain the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, and display the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • an electronic device comprising: a memory, one or more processors; the memory and the processor are coupled; wherein computer program code is stored in the memory, and the computer program code comprises computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
  • a computer-readable storage medium comprising computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method described in any one of the first aspects.
  • a computer program product is provided.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer executes the vehicle positioning method described in any one of the first aspects.
  • beneficial effects that can be achieved by the electronic device described in the third aspect, the computer-readable storage medium described in the fourth aspect, and the computer program product described in the fifth aspect provided above can refer to the beneficial effects in the first aspect and any possible design method thereof, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning method in the related art
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning system shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a module structure of a parking position recording unit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning correction process based on scene switching according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is one of schematic diagrams of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG9 is a schematic diagram of real-time location information shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG10 is a second schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is a third schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG12 is a fourth schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG13 is a fifth schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG14 is a sixth schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG15 is a seventh schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG16 is a second flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG17 is a third flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG18 is a fourth flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG19 is a fifth flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG20 is a schematic structural diagram of a vehicle positioning device shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another electronic device shown in an embodiment of the present application.
  • At least one of the following or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
  • at least one of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • the words “first”, “second”, etc. are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with basically the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that the words “first”, “second”, etc. do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words “first”, “second”, etc. do not necessarily limit the difference.
  • the words “exemplary” or “for example” are not limited to the same items. Used to indicate an example, illustration or description. Any embodiment or design described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of the present application should not be interpreted as being more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or designs. Specifically, the use of words such as “exemplary” or “for example” is intended to present related concepts in a concrete way for easy understanding.
  • VDR Vehicle Dead Reckoning
  • IMU Inertial Measurement Unit
  • an IMU is used to measure the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of an object, and mainly includes gyroscope sensors and accelerometers.
  • an IMU contains three single-axis accelerometers and three single-axis gyroscope sensors.
  • the accelerometer detects the acceleration signal of the object in the carrier coordinate system in three independent axes
  • the gyroscope sensor detects the angular velocity signal of the carrier relative to the navigation coordinate system, measures the angular velocity and acceleration of the object in three-dimensional space, and uses this to calculate the attitude of the object.
  • PDR Pedestrian Dead Reckoning
  • the Global Navigation Satellite System is an air-based radio navigation and positioning system that can provide users with all-weather three-dimensional coordinates, velocity and time information at any location on the Earth’s surface or in near-Earth space.
  • GNSS includes but is not limited to the Global Positioning System (GPS), the GLObalnaya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema (GLONASS), the Beidou Navigation Satellite System (BDS), Europe’s Global Satellite Navigation System (Galileo), the Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) and/or the Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS).
  • GPS Global Positioning System
  • GLONASS GLObalnaya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya
  • BDS Beidou Navigation Satellite System
  • Galileo Global Satellite Navigation System
  • QZSS Quasi-Zenith Satellite System
  • SBAS Satellite Based Augmentation System
  • Forward positioning is to calculate the destination position based on the initial position and travel-related data.
  • the parking position information of the vehicle is calculated based on the driving posture data of the vehicle during driving.
  • Reverse positioning calculation refers to calculating the initial position based on the destination position and travel-related data. For example, for a parked vehicle, the walking posture data of the user after getting off the vehicle is used (the first position corresponding to the last walking posture data is a position that can be accurately located), and the parking position information of the vehicle is calculated based on the first position and the walking posture data.
  • the user refers to a person who rides or drives the vehicle and needs to obtain the parking position information.
  • the user and the electronic device used for reverse positioning calculation are in the same position.
  • the underground garages in the above public places often have the characteristics of large area, many parking spaces, complex driving routes, and many entrances and exits.
  • the parked vehicles have different relative positions. Once the entrance and exit selected when leaving the underground garage is different from the entrance and exit selected when entering the lower garage to find the vehicle, it is difficult to find the parked vehicle through the driving route or walking route.
  • the underground garage has a large area, making it even more difficult to find the parked vehicle. Therefore, it is necessary to determine the parking position information of the vehicle when entering the underground garage to park the vehicle, so as to find the parked vehicle in the underground garage.
  • hardware devices such as cameras, sensors, etc.
  • positioning applications Application, APP
  • the positioning APP is used to obtain parking position information.
  • the server of the positioning APP can analyze and record the parking position information of each vehicle in the underground garage based on the information obtained by the above hardware devices.
  • Users can install the positioning APP on their mobile phones and bind vehicle information such as license plate number, vehicle color, and vehicle model.
  • the positioning APP loads the parking position information corresponding to the bound vehicle information from the server in response to user operations.
  • each underground garage needs to be deployed with hardware and software, resulting in high deployment and maintenance costs, which makes it difficult to promote on a large scale.
  • the positioning APPs deployed in different underground garages are different, users also need to install different positioning APPs, and each time they look for a vehicle in a parked state, they need to start the positioning APP corresponding to the underground garage, resulting in more time cost and system resource cost required to obtain parking position information, which makes it more difficult to promote on a large scale.
  • the vehicle can be positioned by the mobile phone used by the user, wherein the user and the mobile phone are in the same location.
  • the GNSS positioning module, IMU sensor and camera are used to perform positioning. Autonomous navigation and positioning are performed to obtain parking position information.
  • the GNSS positioning module cannot receive the GNSS signal, that is, it is impossible to obtain auxiliary positioning information such as vehicle wheel speed and vehicle angular velocity, and it is impossible to accurately locate the parking position information of the vehicle.
  • the IMU data (driving posture data) detected by the IMU sensor during the driving process of the vehicle is obtained, and the parking position information is obtained by forward positioning recursion through VDR according to the IMU data, and by visual positioning according to the image data captured by the mobile phone camera, wherein the IMU sensor includes a gyroscope sensor and an acceleration sensor.
  • the parking position information obtained by forward positioning recursion through VDR and visual positioning is less accurate, and even the obtained parking position information has a large deviation from the actual parking position information, and it is impossible to find the vehicle in the parked state through the obtained parking position information.
  • the second related technology does not require the deployment of software and hardware in the underground garage.
  • the parked vehicles can be located using the hardware equipment of the mobile phone itself, so it can be promoted on a large scale.
  • the vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application can solve the problem of low accuracy of the parking position information obtained in the above-mentioned second related technology.
  • the electronic device After the vehicle enters the underground garage, when the electronic device cannot accurately locate the real-time position of the vehicle (including the inability to accurately locate the parking position of the vehicle), first, when it is detected that the vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains walking posture data, and the walking posture data is used to detect the walking state of the user.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor and an acceleration sensor.
  • the electronic device locates the user's position by at least one of the following methods: wireless network communication (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) technology, satellite positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology, until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained. Finally, the electronic device performs reverse positioning calculation based on the target positioning information and the walking posture data to obtain the initial position information when the user starts walking, that is, the parking position information corresponding to the parking position of the vehicle.
  • wireless network communication wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi
  • satellite positioning technology satellite positioning technology
  • mobile communication network technology mobile communication network technology
  • Bluetooth communication technology Bluetooth communication technology
  • geomagnetic matching technology geomagnetic matching technology
  • the detection method of the vehicle being in a parked state can be to detect whether the vehicle is turned off, whether the vehicle is parked in a parking space, or whether the IMU data of the vehicle indicates that the vehicle has stopped moving.
  • the first position refers to the first position that can be accurately located in the process of locating the user's position.
  • Walking posture data refers to the IMU data of the user (i.e., the electronic device) obtained during the user's walking from the vehicle parking position to the first position.
  • the electronic device that detects whether the vehicle is in a parked state and the electronic device that obtains the parking position information can be the same or different.
  • the electronic device that detects whether the vehicle is in a parked state is a smart car machine installed and configured on the vehicle, and the electronic device that obtains the parking position information is the user's mobile phone.
  • the premise for positioning through Wi-Fi technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology or geomagnetic matching technology is that the electronic device has a corresponding hardware module, such as a Wi-Fi module, a GNSS positioning module, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) module, a fifth generation mobile communication technology (5G) module, a Bluetooth module or a magnetic sensor.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • 5G fifth generation mobile communication technology
  • the vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application determines the parking position of the vehicle according to the walking posture data during the walking process after the user gets off the vehicle and walks to the position that can be positioned (the first position), when the parking position of the vehicle cannot be accurately positioned when the vehicle is in the parked state. Since the positioning information corresponding to the position that can be positioned (the first position) is accurate and the walking posture data is also accurate, the determined parking position of the vehicle is also accurate, which can improve the accuracy of the parking position information.
  • the vehicle positioning method can be applied to a vehicle positioning system.
  • the vehicle positioning system includes: a first electronic device, a second electronic device, a local server and a cloud server.
  • the first electronic device is used to detect vehicle information
  • the second electronic device is used to detect user information.
  • the user information is generally the user's walking information.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device are the same electronic device, such as the first electronic device is a mobile phone used by the user, and the second electronic device is also a mobile phone used by the user.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device are different electronic devices, such as the first electronic device is an intelligent car machine installed on the vehicle, and the second electronic device is a mobile phone used by the user.
  • the first electronic device may be an electronic device that supports navigation and vehicle positioning, such as a smart car machine, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a smart watch, etc.
  • the second electronic device may be a portable electronic device that supports intelligent navigation and vehicle positioning, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a smart watch, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not impose any special restrictions on the specific form of the electronic device.
  • the vehicle positioning system is described assuming that the first electronic device is a smart vehicle machine and the second electronic device is a mobile phone.
  • the first electronic device includes a first positioning module, a first floor recognition module, a first wireless transmission module and a module for obtaining vehicle data.
  • the first electronic device may obtain the parking location information through the first positioning module and the first floor identification module.
  • the first electronic device may upload the encrypted parking location information to the cloud server, and may also send the parking location information to the second electronic device through the first wireless transmission module (such as a near field communication module such as a Bluetooth module and a Wi-Fi module).
  • the first positioning module may be a GNSS positioning module
  • the first floor identification module may identify the floor where the first electronic device is located based on the fingerprint data of the floor (which can be obtained based on the air pressure value and the wireless signal strength).
  • the second electronic device includes a parking position recording unit, a reverse car search unit, and a local geomagnetic library.
  • the parking position recording unit includes a second positioning module, a second floor identification module, a second wireless transmission module, and a second sensor for acquiring user data.
  • the second sensor may include an IMU sensor and a magnetic sensor.
  • the reverse car search unit includes a map application interface, a user interface UI, a reverse car search positioning module, a second wireless transmission module, and a second sensor.
  • the parking position recording unit and the reverse car search unit can share the second wireless transmission module and the second sensor.
  • the second electronic device can upload the encrypted data acquired by the second sensor to the cloud server.
  • the local geomagnetic library receives the fingerprint data of the floor sent by the cloud server.
  • the parking position recording unit in the second electronic device can obtain the parking position through the second positioning module and the second floor recognition module.
  • the second electronic device can also obtain the vehicle driving posture data and pedestrian walking posture data of the first electronic device and the second electronic device during the parking process, and perform reverse positioning calculation based on the vehicle driving posture data and pedestrian walking posture data to obtain parking position information.
  • the physical hardware corresponding to the parking position recording unit of the second electronic device may include a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, a magnetic sensor, a mobile communication module (including a GSM module, a 5G module, and other communication modules using a cellular wireless networking method), a Wi-Fi module, a GNSS positioning module, and a Bluetooth module.
  • the software function submodule in the second positioning module may include a PDR submodule and may also include a geomagnetic matching submodule.
  • the gyroscope sensor, the acceleration sensor, and the magnetic sensor are respectively connected to the PDR submodule to detect pedestrian walking posture data and perform PDR reverse positioning calculation.
  • the mobile communication module, the Wi-Fi module, the GNSS positioning module, the Bluetooth module, and the geomagnetic sensor are respectively connected to the geomagnetic matching submodule to locate the target position information of the first position.
  • the PDR submodule can also be connected to the geomagnetic matching submodule to realize PDR reverse positioning calculation based on geomagnetic data.
  • the second electronic device can also obtain the driving posture data of the vehicle of the first electronic device, detect the walking posture data of the pedestrians, and send the driving posture data and the walking posture data to the cloud server. Then, the cloud server performs positioning and solution based on the vehicle driving posture data and the pedestrian walking posture data to obtain the parking position information. Finally, the cloud server sends the parking position information to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device can calculate the first information confidence and the second information confidence, wherein the first information confidence refers to the credibility of the forward parking position information obtained by the forward positioning inference method, and the second information confidence refers to the credibility of the reverse parking position information obtained by the reverse positioning inference method.
  • the first information confidence refers to the credibility of the forward parking position information obtained by the forward positioning inference method
  • the second information confidence refers to the credibility of the reverse parking position information obtained by the reverse positioning inference method.
  • the local server is used to preprocess the stored data in the database.
  • the local server includes a geomagnetic fingerprint database, which is used to store scene geomagnetic data, floor identification auxiliary data (such as air pressure, Wi-Fi signal strength, etc.) and underground garage Wi-Fi data.
  • the local server can specifically obtain the fingerprint data of the floor by preprocessing the scene geomagnetic data and the underground garage floor data of the nearby underground garage that can locate the vehicle position.
  • the local server can also encode, compress, encrypt and other processes the preprocessed data and upload it to the cloud server.
  • the cloud server is used to process the vehicle driving posture data and pedestrian walking posture data uploaded by the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the parking position information calculation method includes at least one of the following: the first electronic device loads the data in the positioning database from the cloud server, and then obtains the parking position information based on the loaded data; the cloud server obtains the parking position information based on the data in the positioning database, and then sends the parking position information to the first electronic device.
  • the parking position information calculation method includes at least one of the following: the second electronic device loads the data in the positioning database from the cloud server, and then obtains the parking position information based on the loaded data; the cloud server obtains the parking position information based on the data in the positioning database, and then sends the parking position information to the second electronic device.
  • the reverse vehicle location module in the second electronic device can obtain device location information (the device location information is the location information of the second electronic device in real time) during the process of searching for a parked vehicle, and transmit the device location information and the vehicle location information to the second electronic device.
  • the walking posture data during the process is uploaded to the cloud server.
  • the cloud server calculates the real-time location information of the second electronic device based on the device location information, the walking posture data and the map information of the underground garage, and sends the real-time location information to the second electronic device.
  • the reverse car search and positioning module in the second electronic device can also obtain the device location information, and then calculate the real-time location information of the second electronic device based on the device location information, the walking posture data during the car search process and the map information of the underground garage.
  • the user interface UI in the second electronic device can be embedded with a map application interface, and can display real-time location information and parking location information on the map application interface, and can also display a person and vehicle guidance interface. It can also generate a planned route for finding the car based on the basement map displayed on the map application interface, so as to facilitate reverse car navigation according to the planned route.
  • the vehicle can be located in real time through the above-mentioned vehicle positioning system, and a planned route for finding the vehicle can be generated regardless of whether the underground garage can receive the positioning signal, and vehicle navigation can be performed according to the planned route, which can improve the accuracy of obtaining parking location information and thus increase the speed of finding the vehicle.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device 100 , which may be the first electronic device or the second electronic device mentioned above.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, an antenna 1, an antenna 2, a mobile communication module 150, a wireless communication module 160, an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, a sensor module 180, a button 190, an indicator 192, a display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange the components differently.
  • the components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (GPU), an image signal processor (ISP), a controller, a memory, a video codec, a digital signal processor (DSP), a baseband processor, and/or a neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc.
  • AP application processor
  • GPU graphics processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller a memory
  • video codec a digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • Different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100.
  • the controller may generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and the timing signal to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the processor 110 of the electronic device 100 can obtain walking posture data, and instruct the memory connected through the external memory interface 120 to cache the walking posture data, or instruct the internal memory 121 to cache the walking posture data.
  • the processor 110 can also determine whether it can be accurately positioned, and obtain the first target positioning information (first position) that can be accurately positioned.
  • the positioning method includes at least one of the following: Wi-Fi technology, satellite positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology.
  • the processor 110 can also calculate the walking posture data based on the target positioning information to obtain the parking position information.
  • the processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may store instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or cyclically used. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it may be directly called from the memory. This avoids repeated access, reduces the waiting time of the processor 110, and thus improves the efficiency of the system.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an inter-integrated circuit sound (I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, a general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, a subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and/or a universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2S inter-integrated circuit sound
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 can include multiple I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled to the audio module 170 via the I2S bus to achieve communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit an audio signal to the wireless communication module 160 via the I2S interface to achieve the function of answering a call through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 can be coupled via a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 via the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls via a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit an audio signal to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate via a DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and a peripheral device. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones.
  • the interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is only a schematic illustration and does not constitute a structural limitation on the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • Antenna 1 and antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve the utilization of antennas.
  • antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communications including 2G/3G/4G/5G, etc., applied to the electronic device 100.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, a switch, a power amplifier, a low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, and perform filtering, amplification, and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 may also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 1.
  • at least some of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be arranged in the processor 110.
  • at least some of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be arranged in the same device as at least some of the modules of the processor 110.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless communication solutions including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as Wi-Fi network), Bluetooth (BT), GNSS, frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared (IR), etc., which are applied to the electronic device 100.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS frequency modulation
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication
  • IR infrared
  • the wireless communication module 160 can be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, modulates the frequency of the electromagnetic wave signal and performs filtering, and sends the processed signal to the processor 110.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, modulate the frequency of the signal, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include GSM, general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC, FM, and/or IR technology.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150 so that the electronic device can obtain the target positioning information of the first position through the mobile network technology, that is, according to the hexagonal signal coverage rule of the cellular network, by accessing the location of the mobile communication network.
  • the antenna 2 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can obtain the target positioning information of the first target position through the wireless network technology according to the signal source and signal strength of the wireless network accessed.
  • the wireless network technology is adapted to the connection mode of the wireless network.
  • the target positioning information can be obtained by cross-positioning multiple wireless network technologies.
  • the connection method of the wireless network includes at least one of the following: GNSS, BT, WLAN, NFC and IR.
  • the electronic device 100 implements the display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, which connects the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the electronic device 100 can display target positioning information through the display screen 194, and can also display the driving calculated path obtained based on the vehicle driving posture data obtained during the vehicle's movement, and can also display the parking position information obtained based on the driving calculated path, and can also display the walking calculated path obtained based on the walking posture data, and can also display the parking position information obtained based on the walking calculated path.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (AMOLED), a flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, a quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. For example, files such as music, video, and sensor data can be stored in the external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 can be used to store computer executable program codes, which include instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running the instructions stored in the internal memory 121.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area.
  • the program storage area may store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.
  • the data storage area may store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, a phone book, etc.), etc.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
  • UFS universal flash storage
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions such as music playing and recording through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone jack 170D, and the application processor.
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the pressure sensor 180A can be set on the display screen 194.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor can be a parallel plate including at least two conductive materials.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the touch operation intensity according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 can also calculate the touch position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities can correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100.
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes i.e., x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for anti-shake shooting. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle of the electronic device 100 shaking, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist in positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 is a flip phone, the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip cover according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, the flip cover can be automatically unlocked.
  • the internal memory 121 may cache walking posture data, and the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyro sensor 180B, an acceleration sensor 180E, and a magnetic sensor 180D.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in all directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of the electronic device and is applied to applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching and pedometers.
  • the electronic device detects whether the vehicle is in a parked state through the USB interface 130, the wireless communication module 160, the gyroscope sensor 180B and the acceleration sensor 180E.
  • the electronic device detects the walking posture data through one or more of the gyroscope sensor 180B, the magnetic sensor 180D and the acceleration sensor 180E, and the electronic device caches the walking posture data to an external memory card connected through the external memory interface 120, or caches the walking posture data to the internal memory 121.
  • the electronic device locates the real-time position of the user through the antenna 1 and the mobile communication module 150 until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained; or locates the real-time position of the user through the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160 until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained. Furthermore, the processor 110 of the electronic device performs reverse positioning calculation on the walking posture data according to the target positioning information to obtain the parking position information.
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-core architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the Android system of the layered architecture is taken as an example to exemplify the software structure of the electronic device 100.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the software structure of the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, each with a clear role and division of labor.
  • the layers communicate with each other through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: the application layer, the application framework layer, the Android runtime (Android Runtime) and system library, and the kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message, etc.
  • the application framework layer provides application programming interface (API) and programming framework for the applications in the application layer.
  • API application programming interface
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a telephony manager, a resource manager, a notification manager, and the like.
  • the window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can obtain the display screen size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
  • the data may include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying images, etc.
  • the view system can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can be composed of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text notification icon can include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying images.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100, such as management of call status (including connecting, hanging up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for applications, such as localized strings, icons, images, layout files, video files, and so on.
  • the notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar. It can be used to convey notification-type messages and can disappear automatically after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the system top status bar in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as notifications of applications running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, a text message is displayed in the status bar, a prompt sound is emitted, an electronic device vibrates, an indicator light flashes, etc.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android Runtime is responsible for scheduling and management of the Android system. Among them, the core library contains two parts: one part is the function that the Java language needs to call, and the other part is the Android core library.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in the virtual machine.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to manage the object life cycle, stack management, thread management, security, etc. And exception management, as well as garbage collection and other functions.
  • the system library can include multiple functional modules, such as surface manager, media library, 3D graphics processing library (such as OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (such as SGL), etc.
  • functional modules such as surface manager, media library, 3D graphics processing library (such as OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (such as SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provide the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
  • a 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawings.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
  • the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 is exemplified.
  • the electronic device drives the gyro sensor 180B and the acceleration sensor 180E through the kernel layer to detect the driving posture data, and drives the GNSS in the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160 through the kernel layer to perform real-time positioning of the electronic device.
  • the parking position information is obtained through the notification manager in the application framework layer.
  • the electronic device can run positioning-related programs in the application layer, drive the gyro sensor 180B, the magnetic sensor 180D, and the acceleration sensor 180E through the kernel driver layer to detect the walking posture data, drive the GNSS in the antenna 1 and the mobile communication module 150 through the kernel layer to perform real-time positioning of the first position, and drive the GNSS in the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160 through the kernel layer to perform real-time positioning of the first position.
  • the electronic device obtains the walking posture data and the target positioning information through the content provider in the application framework layer. Through the Android Runtime and the system library, reverse positioning is calculated according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information to obtain the parking position information.
  • the electronic device displays the parking location information on a map through visual controls in the application framework layer.
  • the parking location information can also be searched based on the reverse vehicle search unit in the second electronic device shown in FIG2.
  • the electronic device can run positioning-related programs through the application layer, and obtain walking posture data and walking starting point location information through the content provider in the application framework layer. Then, the electronic device generates the optimal path based on the walking starting point location information, parking positioning information and real-time traffic information (obtained based on the walking posture data) through the Android Runtime and the system library; the electronic device can also implement other logical rules for the operation of the navigation application through the Android Runtime, and provide a bottom-up management rule for the normal operation of the navigation application. Finally, the electronic device stores the map data through the resource manager in the application framework layer, and the electronic device can also display the optimal path, real-time traffic information and parking location information on the map through the visual controls in the application framework layer.
  • the user drives the target vehicle into the target underground garage, wherein the user uses a mobile phone and an intelligent vehicle computer is installed on the target vehicle.
  • the GNSS signal can be received, and the target vehicle is positioned through the vehicle computer GNSS positioning module, IMU sensor and camera.
  • the GNSS positioning module cannot receive satellite signals. Therefore, the IMU data (vehicle driving posture data) detected by the IMU sensor is forward positioned recursively through the VDR, and the image data captured by the camera is visually positioned to obtain the parking position information. It should be noted that the performance constraints of the IMU and the inability to obtain auxiliary positioning information result in the parking position information obtained by forward positioning calculation being often inaccurate.
  • the user's mobile phone is used as an electronic device, and the mobile phone can start to obtain the parking position information through reverse positioning and calculation when the vehicle is parked and the parking position information cannot be obtained.
  • the mobile phone obtains the walking posture data.
  • the mobile phone uses at least one of the following preset positioning technologies: Wi-Fi technology, satellite positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology to locate until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained.
  • reverse positioning and calculation are performed based on the target positioning information and the walking posture data to obtain the user's getting off position information, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained by indirect calculation.
  • the cloud server is used to provide scene geomagnetic data, floor recognition auxiliary data (such as air pressure, Wi-Fi signal strength, etc.) and Wi-Fi data in the underground garage, and the electronic device is used to locate the parked vehicle, to illustrate the vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method may include the following: Next steps S701-S704.
  • the electronic device displays the location information of the target vehicle on a vehicle positioning interface in response to an interface trigger operation input by a user.
  • the target vehicle is a vehicle that the user is riding in or driving.
  • the electronic device is a device that is used by the user and is usually portable. According to the degree of dependence of the user on the electronic device, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be considered that the electronic device and the user are in the same position, that is, the position deviation of the two is less than the preset threshold. It can be understood that during the driving process of the vehicle, the target vehicle, the electronic device and the user can be considered to be in the same position, that is, the position deviation of the three is less than the preset threshold.
  • a user refers to a person who rides or drives a vehicle and needs to obtain parking location information, and the user and the electronic device used for reverse positioning are in the same location.
  • the user-related data such as walking posture data, target positioning information, reference location information
  • the device-related data such as walking posture data, target positioning information, reference location information
  • the electronic device can display map information containing the location information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the target vehicle is in the underground garage of the shopping mall D on the street C of the city B in the region A.
  • the map information may include all cities in the region A, all streets in the city B, all shopping malls covered by the street C, and all architectural structure diagrams of the shopping mall D.
  • the map information when the map information includes the current vehicle position, the physical geographical scope contained in the map information is not artificially limited.
  • the variability of the physical geographical scope of the map information displayed on the vehicle positioning interface can avoid the situation where the target vehicle has been traveling for a long time and is far from the destination, the display map range is small, the user is not familiar with the additional map and has no sense of location information, and cannot judge the road conditions, routes and other information during driving; accordingly, it can also avoid the situation where the target vehicle is close to the destination, the display map range is large, the user cannot see the detailed information in the map clearly, and the difficulty of the user driving the vehicle to the destination is increased.
  • the electronic device when the user is driving the target vehicle in an outdoor scene, can locate the target vehicle in real time.
  • the electronic device can accurately locate the real-time location information of the target vehicle, the real-time location is newly determined as the location information of the target vehicle, and the location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the user and the electronic device are both on the target vehicle, and the target vehicle, the user and the electronic device can be considered to be in the same position, that is, the real-time location information is the location information of the target vehicle, the user and the electronic device.
  • the target vehicle starts from the starting point E and goes to the destination D (shopping mall D)
  • the electronic device displays the target vehicle at the intersection F on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the electronic device when the user is driving the target vehicle in an underground garage scene, the electronic device cannot accurately locate the location information of the target vehicle due to the absence of a signal or signal interference. Therefore, the location information of the target vehicle displayed by the electronic device on the vehicle positioning interface may be range location information.
  • the range location information may be obtained based on the entrance position of the underground garage (the position where the target vehicle can be accurately located) according to a preset deviation range.
  • the range location information may also be the location of the underground garage corresponding to the entrance position of the underground garage.
  • the range location information can be marked by a preset mark, wherein the preset mark can be a circle mark, a rectangle mark, a triangle mark, or other mark that can cover a certain range.
  • the range of the preset identification mark of the electronic device is different according to the different positioning accuracy of the location information.
  • the circle mark can also be highlighted by changing the line color, line thickness, flashing, etc.
  • the circle mark is set to be the same size as displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the circle mark is set to change on the vehicle positioning interface as the scale of the map information and the target vehicle changes. In this way, the relative position of the target vehicle can be prompted to the user through the preset mark, so that the user can adjust the driving status according to the relative position, such as driving speed, driving path, whether to refuel, etc.
  • the diameter of the circle mark is 1 cm; when all shopping malls covered by street C are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, the diameter of the circle mark is also 1 cm.
  • the diameter of the circle mark is adapted to the size of the parking space in the underground garage.
  • the electronic device may not be able to accurately locate the real-time location information of the target vehicle.
  • a circle mark is displayed on the vehicle location interface, and the location information included in the circle mark may be the mall D where the target vehicle is located.
  • a circle mark is displayed on the vehicle location interface, and the location information included in the circle mark may also be inaccurate real-time location information.
  • a circle mark is displayed on the vehicle location interface, and the location information included in the circle mark may be inaccurate real-time location information.
  • the position information may also be the position range information of the target vehicle obtained based on the inaccurate real-time positioning information and according to a preset deviation range.
  • the trigger operation can be used to open the positioning software and trigger the display of the target vehicle's location information on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the interface trigger operation can be a key trigger operation input through a mechanical key (e.g., long pressing the volume up key and the volume down key at the same time), a preset operation input through a touch screen or a screen trigger operation of a preset gesture, an image recognition trigger operation of a specific image captured by a camera, a voice trigger operation of a preset voice received by an audio module, or a wireless trigger operation sent by other electronic devices.
  • the electronic device may display an interface including any of the following: a vehicle position display interface, a video playback interface, an instant chat interface, a game interface, a navigation interface, and a desktop.
  • S702 When the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked, it displays positioning indication information on the vehicle positioning interface and obtains walking posture data.
  • the walking posture data refers to the walking posture data of the electronic device and also the walking posture data of the user.
  • the electronic device obtains the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle when it detects that the target vehicle is parked and the parking location information cannot be obtained.
  • the electronic device may detect that the target vehicle is in a parked state in at least one of the following ways: detecting that the target vehicle is turned off in a preset manner, detecting that the target vehicle is parked in a parking space, receiving a preset voice message (the preset voice message may be a voice message played by a reversing radar), etc.
  • the target vehicle may be passively turned off due to a malfunction, idling, over-temperature protection, improper operation, etc., or it may be actively turned off due to an active operation by the user (the active operation is consistent with the user's needs). Therefore, it is necessary to set the target vehicle to be determined to be in a parked state when the target vehicle is detected to be turned off in a preset manner to avoid misjudgment.
  • the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is in a parked state, and can also make a judgment based on the vehicle driving posture data.
  • the vehicle driving posture data may include sensor data detected by a gyroscope sensor and an acceleration sensor. When the angular velocity of the vehicle driving posture data is 0 and the acceleration is 0 in a continuous time period, it can be determined that the target vehicle is in a parked state.
  • the vehicle driving posture data may be detected by sensors in electronic devices during the vehicle's travel.
  • the driving posture data may also be acquired by the target vehicle's smart car machine during the vehicle's travel.
  • the smart car machine may be connected to the electronic device via a wired connection or via near field communication such as BT, IR, and NFC.
  • the electronic device can obtain walking posture data when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained by using the preset positioning technology, and when it is detected that the electronic device has left the target vehicle.
  • the walking posture data is immediately obtained, which can avoid obtaining walking posture data that cannot be used as a basis for parking position information, reduce resource waste, and reduce the data processing time for obtaining parking position information based on walking posture data, thereby increasing the speed of obtaining parking position information.
  • the electronic device detects whether the user leaves the vehicle in at least one of the following ways: detecting that the connection with the target vehicle (including Bluetooth connection and USB connection) changes from a connected state to a disconnected state; or, receiving preset sensor information, the sensor information is used to indicate that the user's seat belt on the target vehicle changes from a worn state to an unfastened state; or, detecting that the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle includes initial posture data and indicated posture data; wherein the initial posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, and the start time of the first time period is the time when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the difference between the indicated posture data and the initial posture data is greater than a first preset threshold.
  • the smart sensor hub module of the electronic device can detect whether the Bluetooth connection between the electronic device and the target vehicle is disconnected. When the electronic device is removed from the vehicle bracket, the posture of the device will change significantly.
  • the walking posture data acquired by the electronic device only includes the initial posture data, it means that the user has not left the target vehicle to start walking, or it means that the user has not left the target vehicle with the electronic device to start walking. In this case, the parking position information cannot be obtained according to the walking posture data. If the walking posture data acquired by the electronic device includes the initial posture data and the indicating posture data, it means that the user has left the target vehicle with the electronic device to start walking. In this case, the parking position information can be obtained according to the walking posture data.
  • the connection method between the electronic device and the target vehicle includes wireless connection methods such as Bluetooth, infrared, Wi-Fi hotspot, etc., and wired connection methods such as optical fiber, twisted pair, etc.
  • the preset sensor information can be pressure sensor information obtained by a pressure sensor.
  • the posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, and the starting time of the first time period is the time when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the indication posture data refers to the walking posture data whose difference value is greater than the first preset threshold compared with the initial posture data.
  • the electronic device determines the walking posture data obtained during the time period of staying in the vehicle (the time period spent by the user in the vehicle to organize the things he carries with him, dress himself, etc.) as the initial posture data.
  • the indicated posture data refers to the posture data that is significantly different from the initial posture data.
  • the acquisition of the indicated posture data indicates that the user has started walking.
  • the initial posture data may include preset magnetic field data. If the preset magnetic field data changes, it can be determined that the position of the electronic device has not moved, that is, the user has not left the target vehicle to start walking. In the embodiment of the present application, since the space of the target vehicle is limited, the change of the magnetic field data inside the target vehicle is ignored.
  • the electronic device can determine that the user has left the car only when it is determined that the user has left the car in at least two ways, thereby improving the accuracy of determining whether the user has left the car.
  • the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the reference position information refers to the possible position or position range of the target vehicle when the parking position information of the target vehicle cannot be obtained by using the preset positioning technology.
  • the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the target vehicle parking information is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned.
  • Displaying the reference position information can mark the approximate position of the target vehicle, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
  • the positioning indication information is used to indicate that the parking position information of the target vehicle is being positioned, and the indication method of the positioning indication information can be at least one of the following: prompt text, text prompt box, image prompt box and prompt mark.
  • the electronic device can respond to user operations and set the vehicle positioning interface to run in the background, and at the same time, display the positioning indication information in a floating window until the parking location information is obtained.
  • the positioning indication information includes an indication mark.
  • the electronic device may display a refresh mark on the vehicle positioning interface, and the refresh mark indicates that the parking location information has not been obtained by the reverse positioning calculation method through dynamic rotation.
  • the refresh mark may cover the entire vehicle positioning interface and set the transparency to 80%.
  • the positioning indication information includes an indication mark and indication text.
  • the electronic device further displays indication text (locating accurate parking location information) on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the indication text can adjust display attributes such as font size, font color, and display mode in response to user operations.
  • the electronic device displays the reference position information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface, and at the same time, when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state, the electronic device displays the positioning indication information on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the electronic device can also display the reference position information (parking space 2) in a dotted line manner on the vehicle positioning interface to distinguish the reference position information from the parking position information.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked, it can also play a prompt sound, such as locating the parking position of the vehicle for you.
  • the electronic device can display positioning indication information and map information on the vehicle positioning interface, and the geographical range corresponding to the map information includes the reference position information of the target vehicle, and then the reference position information is marked on the map information according to the preset identifier.
  • the reference position information of the target vehicle includes any of the following: estimated position information obtained based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data, the vehicle driving posture data includes the driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain the parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the last position located by the user using the preset positioning technology before leaving the vehicle; or, the first range position information is determined with the position corresponding to the estimated position information as the center and the preset deviation range as the radius; or, the second range position information is determined with the second position as the center and the second preset deviation range as the radius.
  • the first range position information and the second range position information in the reference position information can be marked by a preset mark, wherein the preset mark can be a circle mark, a rectangle mark, a triangle mark, etc. that can contain a certain range.
  • the estimated position information in the reference position information can be marked in the same way as the range position information, or in a different way. Mark it with the positioning icon.
  • the electronic device can determine the area range corresponding to the map information based on the reference location information, the zoom ratio, and the position of the current location in the map information. It is understandable that the electronic device can change the area range corresponding to the map information in response to user operations (such as dragging, zooming, etc.).
  • the electronic device can also display a navigation planning route, the origin of the navigation planning route is the initial position of the target vehicle with respect to the current vehicle driving posture data, and the destination of the navigation planning route is the reference position information. Accordingly, in the process of determining the area range corresponding to the map information, the navigation planning route is also required as a basis so that the entire navigation planning route can be displayed in the map information.
  • the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the vehicle parking information of the target vehicle is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned.
  • the reference position information By marking the reference position information according to the preset mark based on the map information, the approximate position of the target vehicle can be marked, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
  • the walking posture data refers to the posture data continuously generated by the user during the walking process starting from the parked position of the target vehicle, starting from the detection of the target vehicle being in a parked state until the target position information is obtained.
  • the walking posture data actually refers to the collection of posture data continuously detected by the electronic device through the sensor during the user's walking process.
  • the walking posture data can be detected by a sensor on an electronic device carried by the user when walking.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
  • Walking posture data refers to the posture change data of the electronic device itself detected by the electronic device during the user's walking process.
  • the sensor for detecting walking posture data may also include: an air pressure sensor.
  • the air pressure sensor is used to detect the air pressure data of the current position, and the horizontal height of the current position can be determined through the air pressure data.
  • the air pressure data can be used to calculate whether the horizontal height of the electronic device has changed, so that the estimated moving path calculated by the walking posture data is more similar to the actual moving path of the user, thereby improving the accuracy of the obtained parking position information.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device obtains the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, it first displays the first walking path on the vehicle positioning interface based on the walking posture data after the user leaves the vehicle. Next, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the target positioning information of the first position is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. The first position is on the first walking path.
  • the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends to the walking direction of the user, and the first walking path is gradually displayed as the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle increases.
  • the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle can be detected by a sensor on an electronic device carried by the user when walking.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
  • the electronic device displays the first walking path in a dotted line manner on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the user can perform walking navigation according to the first walking path displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, or directly return to the target vehicle location according to the first walking path, thereby reducing the time required for the user to return to the target vehicle and increasing the speed of finding the target vehicle.
  • Displaying the target positioning information on the vehicle positioning interface can determine the relative position of the target positioning information in the map information, so as to prompt the user's location.
  • the electronic device After leaving the vehicle, the electronic device obtains target positioning information corresponding to a first position that can be positioned for the first time.
  • the first position refers to the position of the first word in the position of the electronic device that can be accurately obtained during the process of continuously repositioning the electronic device using the preset positioning technology while the user leaves the target vehicle in a parked state and walks (while the electronic device leaves the target vehicle in a parked state and moves).
  • the preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology.
  • the target positioning information may be latitude and longitude information.
  • the electronic device can locate the location of the electronic device itself. In fact, it can be considered that the user and the electronic device are in the same location (the position deviation between the two is less than a preset threshold), that is,
  • the target positioning information is the target positioning information of the electronic device, and is also the target positioning information of the user.
  • the first position is an uncertain position. Even in the same underground garage, the first position that can be located for the first time may be different due to different walking posture data of the user after leaving the target vehicle or due to different preset positioning technologies.
  • the preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology and geomagnetic matching technology.
  • the premise of positioning through the above preset positioning technology is that the electronic device has the corresponding hardware module, such as Wi-Fi module, GNSS positioning module, GMS module, 5G module, Bluetooth module and magnetic sensor.
  • the vehicle parking information can be obtained, which can improve the speed of obtaining the vehicle parking information.
  • the target positioning information corresponding to the first position can be determined by at least two preset positioning technologies, the accuracy of the obtained target positioning information can be improved, and thus the accuracy of obtaining the vehicle parking information can be improved.
  • the electronic device can also obtain positioning reference information from the cloud server.
  • the positioning reference information may include but is not limited to scene geomagnetic data, floor recognition auxiliary data, and Wi-Fi data in the underground garage.
  • the electronic device can locate the electronic device based on the positioning reference information and the sensor data obtained by the hardware module corresponding to the preset positioning technology, and obtain the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
  • the electronic device since the same Wi-Fi wireless signal is emitted based on a certain point, when the electronic device receives any Wi-Fi wireless signal, it monitors the signal strength of the wireless signal, and determines the distance from the wireless signal source by the strength of the signal and the trend of the signal strength. Thus, the electronic device can locate the electronic device and obtain the target positioning information of the first position.
  • Bluetooth communication technology similar to the positioning method for Wi-Fi technology, when an electronic device receives any Bluetooth signal, it detects the signal strength of the Bluetooth signal, and judges the distance from the Bluetooth signal source by the strength of the signal and the trend of the strength of the signal. Thus, the electronic device can locate the electronic device and obtain the target positioning information of the first position. It should be noted that since the distance of communication via Bluetooth is shorter, the target positioning information obtained through Bluetooth technology is more accurate.
  • the electronic device can determine the longitude and latitude information detected by the GNSS positioning module included in the physical hardware of the electronic device as the target positioning information.
  • the coverage area of each base station is a hexagonal area of a fixed size. Therefore, when an electronic device receives mobile signals from three or more base stations, it obtains the physical distance between the electronic device and the three or more base stations, and then obtains the real-time location information of the electronic device based on the location coordinates of the base stations.
  • the electronic device can obtain the target positioning information of the current location.
  • the electronic device can also obtain target positioning information of the current location based on the above-mentioned at least two preset positioning technologies, and when the deviation amplitude of at least two target positioning information obtained is less than the preset deviation amplitude, determine any one of the target positioning information as the final target positioning information.
  • the electronic device may also display the target location information on the vehicle location interface, while displaying the location indication information. As shown in (b) of FIG14 , the electronic device may display the target location information on the vehicle location interface, while no longer displaying the location indication information.
  • the target positioning information can only be obtained after a period of time has passed after the user leaves the target vehicle, if it is determined that the user has left the vehicle, the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the user in the walking process after leaving the vehicle is obtained after a preset delay time. It should be noted that after it is determined that the user has left the vehicle, the user is in the walking process, and the electronic device obtains the walking posture data after leaving the vehicle.
  • the preset delay time may be preset based on experience, or may be obtained in response to user operation, or may be obtained through a preset acquisition method.
  • the preset acquisition method may include: after the target vehicle enters the underground garage, the electronic device counts the length of time that the preset positioning technology cannot be used for positioning, and then calculates the time length, driving posture data, and the location of the target vehicle.
  • the size of the underground garage is used to calculate the preset delay time for the electronic device to move to the edge of the underground garage or the wireless signal source. If it is impossible to obtain the target positioning information or the possibility of obtaining the positioning information is low, the step of obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is not performed, which can avoid wasting system resources.
  • the electronic device displays the second walking path on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle and the target positioning information.
  • the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction.
  • the position information corresponding to the starting point of the second walking path is the vehicle parking information.
  • S704 The electronic device obtains parking position information according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information through reverse positioning calculation, and displays the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the walking posture data refers to the posture data of the user when walking from the vehicle parking position to the first position.
  • the reverse positioning calculation method refers to calculating the vehicle parking position based on the first position and the walking posture data, that is, calculating the parking position information based on the target positioning information and the walking posture data.
  • the parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained based on the walking posture data after the user leaves the vehicle and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, and the parking position information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the electronic device may also receive an interface refresh operation input by the user, and display the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the correction process of the parking position information may be strengthened.
  • the target positioning information may also be displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, so that the user can visually perceive the spatial distance between the target positioning information and the parking position information.
  • the user carries an electronic device, and the electronic device can also obtain a second walking path during reverse positioning calculation based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information. Compared with the first walking path, the second walking path is the actual walking path of the user. Based on FIG. 13, how the vehicle positioning interface displays the first walking path and the second walking path is described.
  • the electronic device displays the first walking path in a dotted line manner on the vehicle positioning interface, and displays the second walking path in a solid line manner.
  • the vehicle positioning interface changes dynamically.
  • the first walking path and the second walking path are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • a preset time such as 10 seconds
  • the electronic device no longer displays the first walking path on the vehicle positioning interface, and the electronic device only displays the second walking path in a solid line on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the electronic device displays the second walking path only as a solid line on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the electronic device can obtain the estimated position information based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data.
  • the vehicle driving posture data includes the driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain the parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the position last located by the preset positioning technology before the user leaves the vehicle. Thereafter, the electronic device obtains the parking position information through the above steps S702-S704.
  • the electronic device compares the attributes of the estimated position information and the parking position information (such as positioning duration, confidence, accuracy, etc.), and displays the position information with higher confidence (estimated position information or parking position information) on the vehicle positioning interface. In this way, the accuracy of the parking position information of the target vehicle displayed on the vehicle positioning interface is further improved.
  • the attributes of the estimated position information and the parking position information such as positioning duration, confidence, accuracy, etc.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device obtains the parking location information, it can save the parking location information so as to find the target vehicle according to the parking location information in response to user operations later.
  • the acquired sensor data may have a certain deviation from the actual sensor data.
  • it can also be optimized in the following two ways:
  • the first optimization method is that after executing the above step S704, the vehicle positioning method provided by the embodiment of the present application also includes: the electronic device can also first obtain the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position. Then, the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position is obtained, wherein the third position is the position where the user reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position after a preset distance. Furthermore, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position is corrected, and the correction compensation parameters are obtained. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle is corrected and updated. Next, according to the updated walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the target positioning information, the updated parking position information is obtained. Finally, the updated parking position information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  • the above step S704 can be replaced by the following steps: First, based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position. Then, obtain the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position. Furthermore, obtain the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position, and the third position is the position where the user reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position after a preset distance. Next, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, correct the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position, and obtain the correction compensation parameters. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, correct and update the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle. Finally, according to the updated walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the target positioning information, obtain the parking position information.
  • the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position are accurate, the target positioning information is used as the starting position and the correction positioning information is used as the ending position.
  • the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position is corrected to obtain the correction compensation parameters.
  • the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle (until the user arrives at the first position) can be corrected, thereby improving the accuracy of the obtained parking position information.
  • the electronic device can also generate a navigation path in response to the user's vehicle search request, using the parking location information as the target location and the current real-time positioning location as the starting location.
  • the current real-time positioning location is obtained by the electronic device through positioning by a preset positioning technology. In this way, when positioning can be performed by the preset positioning technology, a navigation path is generated, so that navigation can also be performed when positioning cannot be performed by the preset positioning technology, thereby improving the efficiency of finding the target vehicle.
  • the vehicle positioning method of the embodiment of the present application when the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained through conventional preset positioning techniques such as satellite positioning technology, uses the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle as the travel-related data, and uses the target positioning information (i.e., the position information corresponding to the position that the user can first locate using the preset positioning technology during walking) as the destination position, and calculates the initial position (i.e., the position where the user leaves the vehicle, that is, the parking position of the target vehicle), that is, the parking position information is obtained by reverse positioning and calculation.
  • target positioning information i.e., the position information corresponding to the position that the user can first locate using the preset positioning technology during walking
  • the initial position i.e., the position where the user leaves the vehicle, that is, the parking position of the target vehicle
  • the parking position of the target vehicle can be obtained when the parking position of the target vehicle cannot be located by the preset positioning technology, and by ensuring that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is accurate, and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle is accurate, the accuracy of the parking position information can be improved.
  • the vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be an independent application that can be installed in an electronic device, or a module of a map navigation application that can be installed in an electronic device.
  • the electronic device needs to have the authority to obtain walking posture data, target positioning information and parking position information.
  • a user-insensitive positioning method can be used. That is, the vehicle positioning interface is displayed on the front end or the back end, and in the above S702-S704, when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state, the electronic device obtains the parking position information, which can be implemented in the following manner.
  • the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains parking position information, including S1601 - S1604 .
  • the electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
  • the electronic device may detect the distance between the user and the target vehicle, and when the distance is greater than a preset distance, start acquiring the walking posture data.
  • the preset distance may be 1 meter.
  • the electronic device determines that the user has not left the target vehicle, the electronic device continues to determine whether the user has left the target vehicle. It is understandable that when the target vehicle is in a parked state, it is determined whether the user has left the target vehicle.
  • the electronic device may directly obtain the walking posture data without determining whether the target vehicle has been left.
  • the walking path corresponding to the walking posture data refers to the walking path from the time when the user leaves the target vehicle, that is, the user gets off the vehicle, until the user walks to the first position that can be located by the above-mentioned preset positioning technology.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes data such as angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
  • the forward PDR calculation method includes cadence detection, step length estimation, heading estimation, etc., and the user's first walking path is calculated by recursion.
  • the electronic device obtains the first walking path corresponding to the walking posture data and adopts the forward PDR calculation method, overall, the electronic device still obtains the parking position information through the first position in reverse based on the reverse positioning calculation.
  • S1603 The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
  • the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above-mentioned preset positioning technology, that is, when the first position is not obtained, it continues to execute the above-mentioned step S1602 to obtain the walking posture data.
  • 1602 when the user keeps walking, as long as the above steps are executed, 1602 will always calculate the forward positioning and moving path until the positioning information is obtained through technical means such as Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology and their combination methods, then the current position is determined to be the first position that can be located for the first time, and the positioning information is the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
  • technical means such as Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology and their combination methods
  • the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
  • S1604 The electronic device converts the first walking path and the target positioning information to obtain parking position information.
  • the walking trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle is determined according to the walking posture data after the user leaves the vehicle.
  • the first position is used as the end position of the walking trajectory, and the starting position of the walking trajectory is determined, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  • the first walking path is obtained by the device parameters represented by the walking process trajectory.
  • the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends in the walking direction of the user.
  • the user walking parameters include the walking direction and the walking speed.
  • the walking process trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle can be determined based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle without using the preset positioning technology, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined with the first position as the end position of the walking trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be located by the preset positioning technology.
  • using the walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and even cannot be used as a reference position for parking.
  • the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains parking position information, including S1701 - S1704 .
  • the electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
  • This step is similar to S1601 shown in FIG16 , and will not be described again here.
  • the walking path corresponding to the walking posture data refers to the walking path from when the user leaves the target vehicle, that is, when the user gets off the vehicle, until the user walks to the first position.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
  • the electronic device may also cache the walking posture data.
  • S1703 The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
  • the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may also correct the walking posture data.
  • the correction includes: The electronic device can also obtain the first posture data corresponding to the user walking from the first position to the second position; determine whether the second position can be reached by walking from the first position with the first posture data according to the positioning information of the first position and the positioning information of the second position; if the judgment result is no, correct the first posture data and obtain the data compensation parameters; correct and update the walking posture data according to the data compensation parameters.
  • the acquired sensor data may have a certain deviation from the actual sensor data. Therefore, based on the premise that the positioning of the first position and the second position is accurate, the data compensation parameters are calculated, and then the walking posture data is corrected to improve the positioning accuracy of the parking position information obtained through the walking posture data.
  • S1704 The electronic device obtains parking position information through reverse positioning calculation based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information.
  • the second walking path includes a track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction.
  • the second walking path including the track position is obtained based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction, that is, the track position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information, so that it can be ensured that the position corresponding to the target positioning information and the position corresponding to the vehicle parking information belong to the track position, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the acquired vehicle parking information.
  • the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position is determined based on the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  • the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position can be determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined.
  • the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle. This can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by VDR inference is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and it can even be used as a reference position for parking, that is, the accuracy of the parking position information is improved.
  • the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is parked, the electronic device obtains parking location information, including S1801 - S1804 .
  • the electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
  • This step is similar to S1601 shown in FIG16 , and will not be described again here.
  • the electronic device obtains walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data, and obtains a first walking path corresponding to the walking posture data through a forward PDR calculation method and a geomagnetic matching method.
  • the walking posture data includes data such as angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions, and also includes geomagnetic sequence data.
  • the sensor used to detect the geomagnetic sequence data may be a magnetic sensor.
  • the forward PDR calculation method includes cadence detection, step length estimation, heading estimation, etc., and the user's first walking path is calculated by recursion.
  • the geomagnetic sequence data is matched with the scene geomagnetic data, and the first walking path is adjusted according to the degree of matching, thereby improving the accuracy of the first walking path.
  • path-related information can be obtained through Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology, and the path-related information can be used as auxiliary information to correct the first walking path to improve the accuracy of the forward PDR calculation method.
  • the walking posture data may also include geomagnetic data that can determine the floor to improve the accuracy of the parking position information.
  • S1803 The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
  • the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above-mentioned preset positioning technology, that is, when the first position is not obtained, it continues to execute the above-mentioned step S1802 to obtain the walking posture data.
  • the first walking path is always calculated until the first position is obtained, and the target positioning information is obtained through technical means such as Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology and their combinations.
  • the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
  • S1804 The electronic device converts the first walking path and the target positioning information to obtain parking position information.
  • the walking trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle is determined based on the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data after the user leaves the vehicle.
  • the first position is used as the end position of the walking trajectory, and the starting position of the walking trajectory is determined, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  • the first walking path is obtained by the device parameters represented by the walking process trajectory.
  • the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends in the walking direction of the user.
  • the user walking parameters include the walking direction and the walking speed.
  • the walking process trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle can be determined according to the walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data of the user after leaving the vehicle without using the preset positioning technology, and the first position is used as the end position of the walking trajectory to determine the starting position of the walking process trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be positioned by the preset positioning technology.
  • using the walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and even cannot be used as a reference position for parking.
  • the accuracy of the walking process trajectory determined by adding the geomagnetic sequence data can be improved, and the accuracy of the target positioning information corresponding to the first position obtained by using the geomagnetic matching technology can also be improved.
  • the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains parking position information, including S1901 - S1904 .
  • the electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
  • This step is similar to S1601 shown in FIG16 , and will not be described again here.
  • the walking path corresponding to the walking posture data refers to the walking path from the time when the user leaves the target vehicle, that is, the user gets off the vehicle, until the user walks to the first position.
  • the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes multi-directional angular velocity, acceleration, magnetic signal strength, and geomagnetic sequence data, and the sensor used to detect the geomagnetic sequence data can be a magnetic sensor.
  • the electronic device may also cache the walking posture data.
  • S1903 The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
  • the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above preset positioning technology, that is, the first position is not obtained, the above step S1902 is continued to obtain the walking posture data.
  • the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can also correct the walking posture data. Specifically, it includes: the electronic device can also obtain the first posture data corresponding to the user walking from the first position to the second position; determine whether the second position can be reached from the first position by walking with the first posture data; if the judgment result is no, correct the first posture data and obtain the data compensation parameters; according to the data compensation parameters, correct and update the walking posture data.
  • the electronic device due to the deviation of the installation position of the sensor or the deviation of the usage habits, the acquired sensor data may have a certain deviation from the actual sensor data. Therefore, based on the premise that the positioning of the first position and the second position is accurate, the data compensation parameters are calculated, and then the walking posture data is corrected to improve the positioning accuracy of the parking position information obtained through the walking posture data.
  • the electronic device obtains parking position information based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information through reverse positioning calculation and geomagnetic matching.
  • the second walking path includes a track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction.
  • the second walking path including the track position is obtained based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction, that is, the track position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information, so that it can be ensured that the position corresponding to the target positioning information and the position corresponding to the vehicle parking information belong to the track position, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the acquired vehicle parking information.
  • the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position is determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the geomagnetic sequence data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined.
  • the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  • the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position can be determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the geomagnetic sequence data after the user leaves the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined.
  • the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle. This can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by VDR inference is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and it may even be unable to be used as a reference position for parking.
  • a vehicle positioning device is also provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the vehicle positioning device includes a first processing unit 2002 , a second processing unit 2003 and a third processing unit 2004 .
  • the first processing unit 2002 is used to obtain the walking posture data of the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained. For example, step S702 in the above embodiment is executed.
  • the second processing unit 2003 is used to obtain target positioning information corresponding to a first position of the electronic device during movement, where the first position is a position that can be first positioned by the electronic device using a preset positioning technology during movement. For example, step S703 in the above embodiment is executed.
  • the third processing unit 2004 is used to obtain the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, and display the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface. For example, step S704 in the above embodiment is executed.
  • the electronic device includes hardware and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application in combination with the embodiments, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
  • the electronic device can be divided into functional modules according to the above method example.
  • each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device, as shown in FIG. 21 , which may include one or more processors 1001 , a memory 1002 and a communication interface 1003 .
  • the memory 1002 and the communication interface 1003 are coupled to the processor 1001.
  • the memory 1002, the communication interface 1003 and the processor 1001 may be coupled together via a bus 1004.
  • the communication interface 1003 is used for data transmission with other devices.
  • the memory 1002 stores computer program code.
  • the computer program code includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor 1001, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 1001 can be a processor or a controller, for example, it can be a central processing unit (CPU), a general processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the contents of this disclosure.
  • the processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of DSP and microprocessors, and the like.
  • the bus 1004 may be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus.
  • PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
  • the bus 1004 may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc.
  • FIG21 only uses one thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program code is stored.
  • a computer program code is stored.
  • the electronic device executes the relevant method steps in the method embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is run on a computer, it enables the computer to execute the relevant method steps in the above method embodiment.
  • the electronic device, computer storage medium or computer program product provided in this application is used to execute the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method provided above. I will not go into details here.
  • the disclosed devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed in multiple different places. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the present embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that makes the contribution or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to enable a device (which can be a single-chip microcomputer, chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Navigation (AREA)

Abstract

A vehicle positioning method and an electronic device, relating to the technical field of terminals. When parking position information cannot be acquired by means of a conventional positioning technology, reckoning is performed according to walking posture data after a user leaves a target vehicle and accurate positioning information acquired by means of delay, and the parking position information is acquired, so that the accuracy of acquiring the parking position information is improved. The method is applied to the electronic device, and comprises: acquiring walking posture data of the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and parking position information cannot be acquired; acquiring target positioning information corresponding to a first position in the moving process of the electronic device; and acquiring parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information, and displaying the parking position information on a vehicle positioning interface.

Description

车辆定位方法及电子设备Vehicle positioning method and electronic equipment
本申请要求于2022年09月30日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202211214580.5、申请名称为“车辆定位方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on September 30, 2022, with application number 202211214580.5 and application name “Vehicle Positioning Method and Electronic Device”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域Technical Field
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及一种车辆定位方法及电子设备。The present application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular to a vehicle positioning method and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
一般的,在不使用车辆的情况下,用户将车辆停在地下车库。随着车辆保有量的增加,针对同一区域所需的地下车库的车库面积也随之增加,尤其是对于包括商场、机场和火车站等停车需求较高的区域,由此导致地下车库包括更多的车位和更复杂的行车路线,进而导致用户在停车之后很难找到停放的车辆。因此,需要在进入地下车停车时获取停车位置信息,以便于在地下车库寻找停放的车辆。Generally, when the vehicle is not in use, the user parks the vehicle in an underground garage. As the number of vehicles increases, the garage area required for the same area also increases, especially for areas with high parking demand such as shopping malls, airports and railway stations. As a result, the underground garage includes more parking spaces and more complicated driving routes, which makes it difficult for users to find the parked vehicle after parking. Therefore, it is necessary to obtain parking location information when entering the underground parking lot to facilitate finding the parked vehicle in the underground garage.
在相关技术中,可以通过车辆驾驶员使用手机对车辆进行定位(需要说明的是,默认驾驶员与手机处于同一位置)。在进入地下车库后,手机的全球卫星导航系统(Global Navigation Satellite System,GNSS)定位模块,通常不能接收到卫星信号,无法通过卫星定位等常规的定位方式定位车辆位置信息。手机可以根据惯性测量单元(Inertial Measurement Unit,IMU)传感器检测的传感数据,通过车辆航位推算(Vehicle Dead Reckoning,VDR)递推,获得停车位置信息。In related technologies, the vehicle can be positioned by the driver using a mobile phone (it should be noted that the driver and the mobile phone are in the same position by default). After entering the underground garage, the mobile phone's Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) positioning module usually cannot receive satellite signals and cannot locate the vehicle's position information through conventional positioning methods such as satellite positioning. The mobile phone can obtain parking position information through vehicle dead reckoning (VDR) recursion based on the sensor data detected by the inertial measurement unit (IMU) sensor.
然而,由于手机的摆放姿态不稳定和IMU性能约束,可能导致获得的停车位置信息不准确,甚至获取的停车位置信息与实际的停车位置信息偏差较大,无法通过获取的停车位置信息寻找停放的车辆。However, due to the unstable placement of the mobile phone and the performance constraints of the IMU, the obtained parking position information may be inaccurate, or even deviate greatly from the actual parking position information, making it impossible to find the parked vehicle through the obtained parking position information.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种车辆定位方法及电子设备,能够在无法通过常规的定位技术获取停车位置信息的情况下,根据用户离开目标车辆后的行走姿态数据以及延迟获得的准确的定位信息进行推算,获取停车位置信息,以此,提高获取停车位置信息的准确性。The embodiments of the present application provide a vehicle positioning method and electronic device, which can obtain the parking position information by calculating based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the target vehicle and the accurate positioning information obtained with delay, when the parking position information cannot be obtained through conventional positioning technology, thereby improving the accuracy of obtaining the parking position information.
为达到上述目的,本申请的实施例采用如下技术方案:To achieve the above objectives, the embodiments of the present application adopt the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供了一种车辆定位方法,该方法可以应用于能够获取姿态数据的电子设备,如该电子设备可以为手机,针对目标车辆驶入无法通过卫星等常规定位技术准确定位的停车区域(如地下车库)场景。在该方法中,电子设备检测目标车辆是否处于停放状态,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取电子设备的行走姿态数据。接下来,获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息。最后,根据行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息。In the first aspect, a vehicle positioning method is provided, which can be applied to an electronic device capable of acquiring posture data, such as a mobile phone, for a scenario where a target vehicle enters a parking area (such as an underground garage) that cannot be accurately located by conventional positioning technologies such as satellites. In this method, an electronic device detects whether the target vehicle is in a parked state, and when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the walking posture data of the electronic device is obtained. Next, the target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device is obtained. Finally, the parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
其中,第一位置为电子设备在移动过程中采用预设定位技术可首次定位的位置。由于携带电子设备的用户离开目标车辆后的行走路线不同,获取的行走姿态数据不同,或者,由于采用预设定位技术不同,都可能导致可首次定位的第一位置不同。The first position is the position where the electronic device can be located for the first time using the preset positioning technology during the movement. The first position that can be located for the first time may be different due to different walking routes of the user carrying the electronic device after leaving the target vehicle, different walking posture data obtained, or different preset positioning technologies used.
在本申请中,电子设备检测目标车辆处于停放状态,可以通过以下至少一种方式:检测到目标车辆通过预置方式熄火,检测到目标车辆停留在车位上,接收到预置语音消息(预置语音消息可以为倒车雷达播放的语音消息)等等。In the present application, the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked in at least one of the following ways: detecting that the target vehicle is turned off in a preset manner, detecting that the target vehicle is stopped in the parking space, receiving a preset voice message (the preset voice message can be a voice message played by a reversing radar), etc.
如此,在目标车辆处于停放状态,并且通过卫星定位技术等常规技术无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,将电子设备的行走姿态数据作为行进相关数据,将目标定位信息(即,用户在行走过程中采用预设定位技术可首次定位的位置对应的位置信息)作为目的位置,推算初始位置(即电子设备离车的位置,也就是目标车辆的停放位置),即,通过反向定位推算方式获得停放位置信息。以此,能够在无法定位目标车辆的停放位置的情况下,获得目标车辆的停放位置,而且通过确保第一位置对应的目标定位信息是准确的,以及电子设备的行走姿态数据是准确的,能够提高获得停放位置信息的准确性。 In this way, when the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained through conventional technologies such as satellite positioning technology, the walking posture data of the electronic device is used as the travel-related data, and the target positioning information (that is, the position information corresponding to the position that the user can first locate using the preset positioning technology during walking) is used as the destination position to calculate the initial position (that is, the position where the electronic device leaves the vehicle, that is, the parking position of the target vehicle), that is, the parking position information is obtained through reverse positioning and calculation. In this way, the parking position of the target vehicle can be obtained when the parking position of the target vehicle cannot be located, and by ensuring that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is accurate, and the walking posture data of the electronic device is accurate, the accuracy of the parking position information can be improved.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,响应于用户的触发操作,在车辆定位界面显示所述目标车辆的位置信息。如此,能够提示用户目标车辆的位置信息,以便于提高用户对目标车辆的位置信息的感知。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, in response to a user's triggering operation, the location information of the target vehicle is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, so that the user can be prompted with the location information of the target vehicle, so as to improve the user's perception of the location information of the target vehicle.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息之后,在所述车辆定位界面,显示停放位置信息。如此,在车辆定位界面显示停放位置信息,以便于以停放位置信息作为目的地,生成寻找目标车辆的导航路径,提高寻找目标车辆的速度。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, after obtaining the parking location information of the target vehicle, the parking location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. In this way, the parking location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, so that a navigation path for finding the target vehicle is generated with the parking location information as the destination, thereby improving the speed of finding the target vehicle.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息。其中,定位指示信息用于指示正在定位目标车辆的停放位置信息,定位指示信息的指示方式可以为以下至少一项:提示文字、文字提示框、图像提示框和提示标识。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, positioning indication information and reference position information of the target vehicle are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. The positioning indication information is used to indicate that the parking position information of the target vehicle is being positioned, and the positioning indication information can be indicated in at least one of the following ways: prompt text, text prompt box, image prompt box, and prompt mark.
在本申请中,如果在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息,那么响应于用户操作,设置车辆定位界面处于后台运行状态,以悬浮窗方式显示定位指示信息,直至获得停放位置信息。In the present application, if the positioning indication information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, then in response to the user operation, the vehicle positioning interface is set to be in the background running state, and the positioning indication information is displayed in a floating window until the parking location information is obtained.
在本申请中,在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息的情况下,还可以播放定位提示音,如,正在为您定位车辆停放位置。In this application, when the vehicle positioning interface displays positioning indication information, a positioning prompt sound can also be played, such as locating the parking position of the vehicle for you.
可以理解的是,参考位置信息可以通过预置标识标记,预置标识方式可以为能够包含一定范围的圆圈标识、矩形标识或三角标识。It is understandable that the reference position information may be marked by a preset mark, and the preset mark may be a circle mark, a rectangle mark or a triangle mark that can cover a certain range.
如此,在车辆定位界面上同时显示定位置指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息,以提示用户当前处于未得到目标车辆的车辆停放信息的状态,同时也能够提示用户当前位置为不能准确定位位置。显示参考位置信息,能够标记目标车辆的大概位置,避免由于用户遗忘目标车辆的停放位置,并且无法通过GPS定位目标车辆位置,导致难以找到目标车辆。In this way, the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the target vehicle parking information is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned. Displaying the reference position information can mark the approximate position of the target vehicle, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息的过程中,可以首先获取目标车辆的参考位置信息。然后,在车辆定位界面,显示定位指示信息和地图信息,地图信息对应的地域范围包括目标车辆的参考位置信息,再在地图信息上,根据预置标识标记参考位置信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, in the process of displaying the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface, the reference position information of the target vehicle may be first acquired. Then, the positioning indication information and the map information are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, the geographical range corresponding to the map information includes the reference position information of the target vehicle, and then the reference position information is marked on the map information according to a preset identifier.
其中,目标车辆的参考位置信息包括以下任一项:根据目标车辆的第二位置的定位信息和车辆行驶姿态数据,得到的推定位置信息,车辆行驶姿态数据包括目标车辆采用预设定位技术无法获得停放位置信息后获取的行驶姿态数据,第二位置为用户离车前采用预设定位技术最后定位的位置;或者,以推定位置信息对应的位置为中心,与预置偏差范围为半径,确定的第一范围位置信息;或者,以第二位置为中心,以第二预置偏差范围为半径,确定的第二范围位置信息。Among them, the reference position information of the target vehicle includes any of the following items: estimated position information obtained based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data, the vehicle driving posture data including the driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain the parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the last position located by the user using the preset positioning technology before leaving the vehicle; or, the first range position information determined with the position corresponding to the estimated position information as the center and the preset deviation range as the radius; or, the second range position information determined with the second position as the center and the second preset deviation range as the radius.
在本申请中,电子设备可以根据参考位置信息,缩放比例,和当前位置在地图信息中的位置,确定地图信息对应的区域范围。可以理解的是,电子设备可以响应于用户操作(如拖拽、缩放等),改变地图信息对应的区域范围。In the present application, the electronic device can determine the area range corresponding to the map information based on the reference location information, the zoom ratio, and the position of the current location in the map information. It is understandable that the electronic device can change the area range corresponding to the map information in response to user operations (such as dragging, zooming, etc.).
在本申请中,电子设备还可以显示导航规划路线,导航规划路线的始发地为目标车辆对当前的车辆行驶姿态数据的初始位置,导航规划路线的目的地为参考位置信息。相应的,在确定地图信息对应的区域范围过程中,还需要以导航规划路线为依据,以使得在地图信息中能够显示整个导航规划路线。In the present application, the electronic device can also display a navigation planning route, the origin of the navigation planning route is the initial position of the target vehicle to the current vehicle driving posture data, and the destination of the navigation planning route is the reference position information. Accordingly, in the process of determining the area range corresponding to the map information, the navigation planning route is also required as a basis so that the entire navigation planning route can be displayed in the map information.
如此,在车辆定位界面上同时显示定位置指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息,以提示用户当前处于未得到目标车辆的车辆停放信息的状态,同时也能够提示用户当前位置为不能准确定位位置。通过在地图信息的基础上,根据预置标识标记参考位置信息,能够标记目标车辆的大概位置,避免由于用户遗忘目标车辆的停放位置,并且无法通过GPS定位目标车辆位置,导致难以找到目标车辆。In this way, the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the vehicle parking information of the target vehicle is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned. By marking the reference position information according to the preset mark based on the map information, the approximate position of the target vehicle can be marked, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,车辆定位方法还包括:在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息,并且检测到电子设备离开目标车辆的情况下,获取电子设备的行走姿态数据。如此,在电子设备离开目标车辆后,再获取电子设备的行走姿态数据,能够减少行走姿态数据的数据量,提高获得目标车辆的停放位置信息的速度。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the vehicle positioning method further includes: when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, and when it is detected that the electronic device has left the target vehicle, acquiring the walking posture data of the electronic device. In this way, after the electronic device leaves the target vehicle, the walking posture data of the electronic device is acquired, which can reduce the amount of the walking posture data and improve the speed of obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述检测电子设备离开目标车辆,包括以下至少一项:检测到与目标车辆的连接由连接状态变化为切断状态;或者,接收到预置传感信息,传感信息用 于指示目标车辆上的用户安全带从佩戴状态转变为解开状态;或者,检测到行走姿态数据包括初始姿态数据和指示姿态数据;其中,初始姿态数据是指与第一时间段对应的行走姿态数据,第一时间段的开始时刻为检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的时刻;指示姿态数据与初始姿态数据的差异值大于第一预置阈值。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the detecting that the electronic device leaves the target vehicle includes at least one of the following: detecting that the connection with the target vehicle changes from a connected state to a disconnected state; or receiving preset sensor information, and using the sensor information to detect that the connection with the target vehicle changes from a connected state to a disconnected state; to indicate that a seat belt of a user on the target vehicle changes from a worn state to an unfastened state; or, the detected walking posture data includes initial posture data and indicated posture data; wherein the initial posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, and the start time of the first time period is the time when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the difference between the indicated posture data and the initial posture data is greater than a first preset threshold.
其中,电子设备与目标车辆的连接方式包括蓝牙、红外、Wi-Fi热点等无线连接方式,以及光纤、双绞线等有线连接方式。预置传感信息可以是通过压力传感器获取的压力传感信息。The connection method between the electronic device and the target vehicle includes wireless connection methods such as Bluetooth, infrared, Wi-Fi hotspot, etc., and wired connection methods such as optical fiber, twisted pair, etc. The preset sensing information can be pressure sensing information obtained by a pressure sensor.
可以理解的是,电子设备检测到目标车辆处于停放状态后,将在车内停留的时间段(用户在车内整理随身携带的东西、整体着装等,耗费的时间段)获取的行走姿态数据确定为初始姿态数据。指示姿态数据,是指与初始姿态数据具有明显差异的姿态数据,获取到指示姿态数据,即说明用户携带电子设备离开目标车辆开始行走。It is understandable that after the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked, the walking posture data obtained during the time period of staying in the vehicle (the time period spent by the user in the vehicle to organize the things he carries with him, dress himself, etc.) is determined as the initial posture data. The indicated posture data refers to the posture data that is significantly different from the initial posture data. The acquisition of the indicated posture data indicates that the user has left the target vehicle with the electronic device and started walking.
本申请中,电子设备可以在通过至少两种方式判断出电子设备离开目标车辆的情况下,才能确定电子设备离开目标车辆,以此提高确定电子设备是否离车的准确性。In the present application, the electronic device can determine that the electronic device has left the target vehicle only when it is determined in at least two ways that the electronic device has left the target vehicle, thereby improving the accuracy of determining whether the electronic device has left the vehicle.
如此,通过设置多种方式确定电子设备是否离开目标车辆,能够避免由于目标车辆所处环境或电子设备硬件设备状态对判断结果的影响,进而能够提高电子设备是否离开目标车辆的准确性。In this way, by setting up multiple methods to determine whether the electronic device has left the target vehicle, the influence of the environment of the target vehicle or the hardware status of the electronic device on the judgment result can be avoided, thereby improving the accuracy of whether the electronic device has left the target vehicle.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,可以采用以下方式实现:如果电子设备离开目标车辆,则经过预设延迟时间之后,获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the above-mentioned acquisition of target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the electronic device during movement can be implemented in the following manner: if the electronic device leaves the target vehicle, then after a preset delay time, the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the electronic device during movement is acquired.
其中,预设延迟时间可以为根据经验预先设置的,还可以是响应于用户操作获取的,还可以是通过预置获取方式获取的。上述预置获取方式可以包括:在目标车辆驶入地下车库后,统计无法采用预设定位技术进行定位的时间长度,再根据该时间长度、行驶姿态数据、以及地下车库的面积大小,推算电子设备移动到地下车库边缘位置或者无线信号源的预设延迟时间。The preset delay time may be pre-set based on experience, or may be obtained in response to a user operation, or may be obtained through a preset acquisition method. The preset acquisition method may include: after the target vehicle enters the underground garage, counting the length of time during which the preset positioning technology cannot be used for positioning, and then calculating the preset delay time for the electronic device to move to the edge of the underground garage or the wireless signal source based on the length of time, the driving posture data, and the size of the underground garage.
如此,通过设置在确定电子设备离开目标车辆经过预设延迟时间之后,再获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,能够避免在不可能获取目标定位信息,或者获取定位信息的可能性较低的情况下,执行获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息的无效操作,能够避免浪费电子设备的系统资源。In this way, by setting the time when the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the electronic device during its movement is obtained after determining that the electronic device has left the target vehicle for a preset delay time, it is possible to avoid executing an invalid operation of obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position when it is impossible to obtain the target positioning information or the possibility of obtaining the positioning information is low, thereby avoiding wasting system resources of the electronic device.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述获取电子设备的行走姿态数据之后,首先根据电子设备的行走姿态数据,在车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径,接下来,在获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,在车辆定位界面显示第一位置的目标定位信息,第一位置在第一行走路径上。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, after the walking posture data of the electronic device is obtained, the first walking path is first displayed on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data of the electronic device. Next, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the target positioning information of the first position is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, and the first position is on the first walking path.
其中,第一行走路径以参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向电子设备的行走方向延伸,第一行走路径随着电子设备离车后的行走姿态数据的增加逐步显示。电子设备离车后的行走姿态数据可以通过用户行走时携带的电子设备上的传感器来检测。如,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器和磁传感器等。基于此,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度和磁信号强度等。The first walking path starts from the position indicated by the reference position information and extends in the walking direction of the electronic device, and the first walking path is gradually displayed as the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the vehicle increases. The walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the vehicle can be detected by a sensor on the electronic device carried by the user when walking. For example, the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
如此,在电子设备离开目标车辆且未获取到停放位置信息的情况下,一旦用户突然发现需要返回目标车辆取东西或者驾驶目标车辆离开,用户可以根据在车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径,进行步行导航,或者直接根据第一行走路径返回至目标车辆位置,提高用户返回目标车辆所需的时间,提高寻找目标车辆的速度。在车辆定位界面显示目标定位信息,能够确定目标定位信息在地图信息中的相对位置,以便于提示用户所处的位置。In this way, when the electronic device leaves the target vehicle and the parking location information is not obtained, once the user suddenly finds that he needs to return to the target vehicle to pick up something or drive the target vehicle away, the user can perform walking navigation according to the first walking path displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, or directly return to the target vehicle location according to the first walking path, thereby reducing the time required for the user to return to the target vehicle and improving the speed of finding the target vehicle. Displaying the target positioning information on the vehicle positioning interface can determine the relative position of the target positioning information in the map information, so as to prompt the user's location.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法还包括:获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据行走姿态数据,以及目标定位信息,在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the above-mentioned vehicle positioning method also includes: after obtaining target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device, displaying a second walking path on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information.
其中,第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向电子设备的行走方向的相反方向延伸。第二行走路径的起点对应的位置信息为车辆停放信息。The second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device. The location information corresponding to the starting point of the second walking path is the vehicle parking information.
如此,通过在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径,以使得用户能够直观感知目标车辆的停放位置信息、目标定位信息、以及第二行走路径,有助于用户增强方向意识,提高用户对所处位置的了解程度。In this way, by displaying the second walking path on the vehicle positioning interface, the user can intuitively perceive the parking position information of the target vehicle, the target positioning information, and the second walking path, which helps the user to enhance the sense of direction and improve the user's understanding of their location.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法还包括:在电子设备移动过程中, 根据行走姿态数据确定电子设备的行走过程轨迹。在此基础上,将第一位置作为行走过程轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the vehicle positioning method further includes: during the movement of the electronic device, The walking process track of the electronic device is determined according to the walking posture data. On this basis, the first position is used as the end position of the walking process track to determine the starting position of the walking process track, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
其中,行走过程轨迹的推算方式包括步频检测、步长估计、航向估计等,通过递推的方式,推算用户的第一行走路径。Among them, the calculation method of the walking process trajectory includes step frequency detection, step length estimation, heading estimation, etc., and the user's first walking path is calculated by recursion.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据行走姿态数据确定电子设备的行走过程轨迹,并以第一位置作为行走轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,即目标车辆的停放位置信息,以使得在无法通过预设定位技术无法对目标车辆进行定位的情况下仍然能够获取目标车辆的停放位置信息。同时,利用行走姿态数据确定行走过程轨迹,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题。In this way, the walking process trajectory of the electronic device can be determined according to the walking posture data without using the preset positioning technology, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined by taking the first position as the end position of the walking trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be positioned by the preset positioning technology. At the same time, using the walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method is significantly reduced due to the performance constraints of the IMU of the electronic device, and it can even be used as a reference position for parking.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法还包括:在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取电子设备的地磁序列数据;并且,在电子设备移动过程中,根据行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据,确定电子设备的行走过程轨迹。然后,采用预设定位技术,获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,其中,预设定位技术至少包括地磁匹配技术。最后,将第一位置作为行走过程轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the vehicle positioning method further includes: when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the geomagnetic sequence data of the electronic device is obtained; and during the movement of the electronic device, the walking process trajectory of the electronic device is determined according to the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data. Then, a preset positioning technology is used to obtain the target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device, wherein the preset positioning technology at least includes geomagnetic matching technology. Finally, the first position is used as the end position of the walking process trajectory, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据,确定电子设备的行走过程轨迹,并以第一位置作为行走轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,即目标车辆的停放位置信息,以使得在无法通过预设定位技术无法对目标车辆进行定位的情况下仍然能够获取目标车辆的停放位置信息。同时,利用行走姿态数据确定行走过程轨迹,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题。同时,由于地磁序列数据与目标车辆所处的环境关联性较强,因此,能够提高加入地磁序列数据确定的行走过程轨迹的准确性,还能够提高采用地磁匹配技术获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息的准确性。In this way, the walking process trajectory of the electronic device can be determined according to the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data without the need for a preset positioning technology, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined with the first position as the end position of the walking trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be positioned by the preset positioning technology. At the same time, the use of walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device is significantly reduced, and even cannot be used as a reference position for parking. At the same time, since the geomagnetic sequence data is highly correlated with the environment in which the target vehicle is located, the accuracy of the walking process trajectory determined by adding the geomagnetic sequence data can be improved, and the accuracy of the target positioning information corresponding to the first position obtained by using the geomagnetic matching technology can also be improved.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法中,在车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径的情况下,第一行走路径是通过行走过程轨迹表示的设备移动参数得到的,第一行走路径以参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向用户的行走方向延伸,设备移动参数包括行走方向和行走速度。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, in the above-mentioned vehicle positioning method, when the vehicle positioning interface displays the first walking path, the first walking path is obtained by the device movement parameters represented by the walking process trajectory, and the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends in the user's walking direction, and the device movement parameters include the walking direction and the walking speed.
如此,通过依据行走姿态数据获取的第一行走路径和行走过程轨迹,以确保目标定位信息、车辆停放信息与第一行走路径的一致性,进而确保获取的车辆停放信息的准确性。In this way, by obtaining the first walking path and the walking process trajectory based on the walking posture data, the consistency of the target positioning information, the vehicle parking information and the first walking path is ensured, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the obtained vehicle parking information.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述根据行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息,包括:在获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息和行走姿态数据,确定电子设备移动至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定电子设备移动的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the above-mentioned obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position includes: after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, determining the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data, until the starting position of the electronic device's movement is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息和用户离车后的行走姿态数据,确定电子设备移动至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定电子设备移动的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题,即,提高停放位置信息的准确性。In this way, without using the preset positioning technology, the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position can be determined based on the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined. The starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle. This can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by VDR inference is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and it may even be unable to be used as a reference position for parking, that is, the accuracy of the parking position information is improved.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法还包括:在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取电子设备的地磁序列数据。在此基础上,在获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息、行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据,确定电子设备移动至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定电子设备移动的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the vehicle positioning method further includes: when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, obtaining geomagnetic sequence data of the electronic device. On this basis, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data, the trajectory position of the electronic device before moving to the first position is determined, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息、行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据,确定电子设备移动至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定电子设备移动的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推 断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题。In this way, without using the preset positioning technology, the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position can be determined according to the target positioning information, walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data corresponding to the first position, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined. The starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle, which can avoid the error caused by the IMU performance constraint of the electronic device through VDR inference. The accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the interruption method is significantly reduced, and it may even be unable to be used as a reference position for parking.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法中,在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径的情况下,第二行走路径包括轨迹位置,第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向电子设备的行走方向的相反方向延伸。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, in the above-mentioned vehicle positioning method, when the vehicle positioning interface displays the second walking path, the second walking path includes a track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device.
如此,依据行走姿态数据获取包括轨迹位置的第二行走路径,并且第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向电子设备的行走方向的相反方向延伸,也就是第二行走路径的轨迹位置包括车辆停放信息,以此,能够确保目标定位信息对应的位置和车辆停放信息对应的位置属于轨迹位置,进而确保获取的车辆停放信息的准确性。In this way, a second walking path including a trajectory position is obtained based on the walking posture data, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device, that is, the trajectory position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information. In this way, it can be ensured that the position corresponding to the target positioning information and the position corresponding to the vehicle parking information belong to the trajectory position, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the acquired vehicle parking information.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在根据行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息之后,还可以先获取电子设备离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据。然后,获取第三位置对应的校正定位信息,其中,第三位置为电子设备离开第一位置后经过预置距离到达定位的位置。再,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正电子设备离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数。接下来,根据校正补偿参数,校正并更新行走姿态数据。再接下来,根据更新后的行走姿态数据,以及目标定位信息,获取更新后的停放位置信息。最后,在车辆定位界面,显示更新后的停放位置信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, after obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position can also be obtained first. Then, the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position is obtained, wherein the third position is the position where the electronic device reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position after a preset distance. Then, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, the walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position is corrected to obtain the correction compensation parameters. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, the walking posture data is corrected and updated. Next, according to the updated walking posture data and the target positioning information, the updated parking position information is obtained. Finally, the updated parking position information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
如此,由于第一位置对应的目标定位信息,以及第三位置对应的校正定位信息是准确的,因此,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正电子设备离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数,能够对电子设备离车后的行走姿态数据(直至用户抵达第一位置为止)进行校正,进而提高获取的停放位置信息的精确度。In this way, since the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position are accurate, the target positioning information is used as the starting position and the correction positioning information is used as the ending position. The walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position is corrected, and the correction compensation parameters are obtained. The walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the vehicle (until the user arrives at the first position) can be corrected, thereby improving the accuracy of the acquired parking position information.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述根据行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息,还可以通过以下方式实现:首先,获取行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息。然后,获取电子设备离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据。再者,获取第三位置对应的校正定位信息,第三位置为用户离开第一位置后经过预置距离到达定位的位置。接下来,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正点设备离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数。再接下来,根据校正补偿参数,校正并更新行走姿态数据。最后,根据更新后的行走姿态数据,以及目标定位信息,获得停放位置信息。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the above-mentioned acquisition of the parking position information of the target vehicle based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position can also be implemented in the following manner: First, the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position are acquired. Then, the walking posture data after the electronic device leaves the first position is acquired. Furthermore, the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position is acquired, and the third position is the position where the user reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position and passing a preset distance. Next, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, the walking posture data after the correction point device leaves the first position is corrected to acquire the correction compensation parameters. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, the walking posture data is corrected and updated. Finally, according to the updated walking posture data and the target positioning information, the parking position information is acquired.
如此,由于第一位置对应的目标定位信息,以及第三位置对应的校正定位信息是准确的,因此,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正用户离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数,能够对电子设备的行走姿态数据(直至用户抵达第一位置为止)进行校正,进而提高获取的停放位置信息的精确度。In this way, since the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position are accurate, the target positioning information is used as the starting position and the correction positioning information is used as the ending position. The walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position is corrected, and the correction compensation parameters are obtained. The walking posture data of the electronic device (until the user arrives at the first position) can be corrected, thereby improving the accuracy of the obtained parking position information.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法还包括:根据行走姿态数据和目标定位信息,获得停放位置信息之后,响应于用户的车辆寻找请求,以停放位置信息为目标位置,以当前实时定位位置为起始位置,生成导航路径。可以理解的是,当前实时定位位置是电子设备通过预设定位技术进行定位得到的。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the vehicle positioning method further includes: after obtaining the parking position information according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information, in response to the user's vehicle search request, generating a navigation path with the parking position information as the target position and the current real-time positioning position as the starting position. It can be understood that the current real-time positioning position is obtained by positioning the electronic device through a preset positioning technology.
如此,在能够通过预设定位技术进行定位的情况下,生成导航路径,以使得在无法通过预设定位技术进行定位的情况下,也能够进行导航,提高寻找目标车辆的效率。In this way, when positioning can be performed using the preset positioning technology, a navigation path is generated, so that navigation can also be performed when positioning cannot be performed using the preset positioning technology, thereby improving the efficiency of finding the target vehicle.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,上述车辆定位方法中,预设定位技术包括以下至少一项:卫星定位技术、无线网络通信Wi-Fi技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the above-mentioned vehicle positioning method, the preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology and geomagnetic matching technology.
如此,如果设置通过任一预设定位技术确定第一位置对应的目标定位信息,都可以获取车辆停放信息,能够提高获取车辆停放信息的速度。同时,如果设置通过至少两项预设定位技术才能够确定第一位置对应的目标定位信息,能够提高获取到的目标定位信息的准确性,进而能够提高获取车辆停放信息的准确性。In this way, if it is set that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is determined by any preset positioning technology, the vehicle parking information can be obtained, which can improve the speed of obtaining the vehicle parking information. At the same time, if it is set that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position can be determined by at least two preset positioning technologies, the accuracy of the obtained target positioning information can be improved, and thus the accuracy of obtaining the vehicle parking information can be improved.
第二方面,提供了一种车辆定位装置,包括第一处理单元、第二处理单元和第三处理单元。其中,第一处理单元用于在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取电子设备的行走姿态数据。第二处理单元用于获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,第一位置为电子设备在移动过程中采用预设定位技术可首次定位的位置。第三处理单元 用于根据行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息,并且在车辆定位界面显示停放位置信息。In a second aspect, a vehicle positioning device is provided, comprising a first processing unit, a second processing unit and a third processing unit. The first processing unit is used to obtain walking posture data of the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained. The second processing unit is used to obtain target positioning information corresponding to a first position of the electronic device during movement, where the first position is the position where the electronic device can be located for the first time using a preset positioning technology during movement. The third processing unit It is used to obtain the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, and display the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface.
第三方面,提供了一种电子设备,包括:存储器、一个或多个处理器;存储器和处理器耦合;其中,存储器中存储有计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当计算机指令被处理器执行时,使得电子设备执行上述第一方面任一项所述的车辆定位方法。In a third aspect, an electronic device is provided, comprising: a memory, one or more processors; the memory and the processor are coupled; wherein computer program code is stored in the memory, and the computer program code comprises computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method described in any one of the above-mentioned first aspects.
第四方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述第一方面任一项所述的车辆定位方法。In a fourth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, comprising computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method described in any one of the first aspects.
第五方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面任一项所述的车辆定位方法。In a fifth aspect, a computer program product is provided. When the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer executes the vehicle positioning method described in any one of the first aspects.
可以理解地,上述提供的第三方面所述的电子设备,第四方面所述的计算机可读存储介质,第五方面所述的计算机程序产品所能达到的有益效果,可参考第一方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that the beneficial effects that can be achieved by the electronic device described in the third aspect, the computer-readable storage medium described in the fourth aspect, and the computer program product described in the fifth aspect provided above can refer to the beneficial effects in the first aspect and any possible design method thereof, and will not be repeated here.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1为相关技术中的车辆定位方法的示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning method in the related art;
图2为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位系统的示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning system shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例示出的一种停车位置记录单元的模块结构示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a module structure of a parking position recording unit according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例示出的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例示出的一种电子设备的软件结构示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例示出的一种基于场景切换的车辆定位校正过程的示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning correction process based on scene switching according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位方法的流程示意图之一;FIG. 7 is a flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之一;FIG8 is one of schematic diagrams of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例示出的一种实时位置信息的示意图;FIG9 is a schematic diagram of real-time location information shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之二;FIG10 is a second schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之三;FIG11 is a third schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之四;FIG12 is a fourth schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之五;FIG13 is a fifth schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之六;FIG14 is a sixth schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位界面的示意图之七;FIG15 is a seventh schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning interface shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位方法的流程示意图之二;FIG16 is a second flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位方法的流程示意图之三;FIG17 is a third flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位方法的流程示意图之四;FIG18 is a fourth flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位方法的流程示意图之五;FIG19 is a fifth flow chart of a vehicle positioning method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例示出的一种车辆定位装置的结构示意图;FIG20 is a schematic structural diagram of a vehicle positioning device shown in an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例示出的另一种电子设备的结构示意图。FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another electronic device shown in an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。并且,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。同时,在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词 用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。The technical solution in the embodiment of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiment of the present application. Among them, in the description of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "/" indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship, for example, A/B can represent A or B; "and/or" in the present application is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. And, in the description of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "multiple" refers to two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can represent: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, c can be single or multiple. In addition, in order to clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, the words "first", "second", etc. are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with basically the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art can understand that the words "first", "second", etc. do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words "first", "second", etc. do not necessarily limit the difference. At the same time, in the embodiments of the present application, the words "exemplary" or "for example" are not limited to the same items. Used to indicate an example, illustration or description. Any embodiment or design described as "exemplary" or "for example" in the embodiments of the present application should not be interpreted as being more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or designs. Specifically, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "for example" is intended to present related concepts in a concrete way for easy understanding.
本申请实施例涉及的技术术语包括:The technical terms involved in the embodiments of this application include:
车辆航位推算(Vehicle Dead Reckoning,VDR),用于精确推算车辆速度、动/静状态等。具体包括:通过监测车辆动/静状态、速度和行进方向,通过历史轨迹及单点数据特征优化卫星定位,实现对速度、方向、驾车习惯、卫星定位等驾车状态的偏置估计,保证推算结果更加准确可信。Vehicle Dead Reckoning (VDR) is used to accurately estimate vehicle speed, dynamic/static status, etc. Specifically, it includes: by monitoring the dynamic/static status, speed and direction of the vehicle, optimizing satellite positioning through historical trajectory and single-point data characteristics, achieving biased estimation of driving status such as speed, direction, driving habits, satellite positioning, etc., to ensure that the estimated results are more accurate and reliable.
惯性测量单元(Inertial Measurement Unit,IMU),用于测量物体三轴姿态角(或角速率)以及加速度,主要包括陀螺仪传感器和加速度传感器。通常的,一个IMU包含了三个单轴的加速度传感器和三个单轴的陀螺仪传感器,加速度传感器检测物体在载体坐标系统独立三轴的加速度信号,而陀螺仪传感器检测载体相对于导航坐标系的角速度信号,测量物体在三维空间中的角速度和加速度,并以此解算出物体的姿态。Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) is used to measure the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of an object, and mainly includes gyroscope sensors and accelerometers. Usually, an IMU contains three single-axis accelerometers and three single-axis gyroscope sensors. The accelerometer detects the acceleration signal of the object in the carrier coordinate system in three independent axes, while the gyroscope sensor detects the angular velocity signal of the carrier relative to the navigation coordinate system, measures the angular velocity and acceleration of the object in three-dimensional space, and uses this to calculate the attitude of the object.
行人航位推算(Pedestrian Dead Reckoning,PDR),用于在无信标的条件下,对行人进行跟踪定位,可以应用于步行场景。PDR可以实现从室外到室内定位的平滑过渡,以及在GNSS短暂定位失败时,持续提供定位能力。Pedestrian Dead Reckoning (PDR) is used to track and locate pedestrians in the absence of beacons and can be applied to walking scenarios. PDR can achieve a smooth transition from outdoor to indoor positioning and continue to provide positioning capabilities when GNSS positioning fails temporarily.
全球卫星导航系统(Global Navigation Satellite System,GNSS),是能在地球表面或近地空间的任何地点为用户提供全天候的三维坐标、速度以和时间信息的空基无线电导航定位系统。GNSS包括但不限于全球卫星定位系统(Global Positioning System,GPS),格洛纳斯卫星导航系统(GLObalnaya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(Beidou Navigation Satellite System,BDS),伽利略卫星导航系统(Europe’s Global Satellite Navigation System,Galileo),准天顶卫星系统(Quasi-Qenith Satellite System,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(Satellite Based Augmentation Systems,SBAS)。The Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is an air-based radio navigation and positioning system that can provide users with all-weather three-dimensional coordinates, velocity and time information at any location on the Earth’s surface or in near-Earth space. GNSS includes but is not limited to the Global Positioning System (GPS), the GLObalnaya NAvigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema (GLONASS), the Beidou Navigation Satellite System (BDS), Europe’s Global Satellite Navigation System (Galileo), the Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) and/or the Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS).
正向定位推算,是指根据初始位置和行进相关数据,推算目的位置。示例的,通过车辆行驶过程中的行驶姿态数据,推算车辆的停放位置信息。Forward positioning is to calculate the destination position based on the initial position and travel-related data. For example, the parking position information of the vehicle is calculated based on the driving posture data of the vehicle during driving.
反向定位推算,是指根据目的位置和行进相关数据,推算初始位置。示例的,对处于停放状态的车辆,通过用户下车后行走过程中的行走姿态数据(最后一个行走姿态数据对应的第一位置,是能够被准确定位的位置),根据第一位置和行走姿态数据推算车辆的停放位置信息。其中,用户是指乘坐或驾驶车辆,且需要得到停放位置信息的人,用户与用于反向定位推算的电子设备处于同一位置。Reverse positioning calculation refers to calculating the initial position based on the destination position and travel-related data. For example, for a parked vehicle, the walking posture data of the user after getting off the vehicle is used (the first position corresponding to the last walking posture data is a position that can be accurately located), and the parking position information of the vehicle is calculated based on the first position and the walking posture data. Among them, the user refers to a person who rides or drives the vehicle and needs to obtain the parking position information. The user and the electronic device used for reverse positioning calculation are in the same position.
随着车辆保有量的增加,驾车出行的次数也不断增加,尤其是,在出行目的地为商场、机场和火车站等公共场所的情况下,选择驾车出行的概率越大。为了满足停车需求,往往上述公共场所的地下车库具有面积大、车位多、行车路线复杂和出入口多等特点,对于不同的出入口而言,处于停放状态的车辆具有不同的相对位置,一旦离开地下车库时选择的出入口与进入下车库寻找车辆时选择的出入口不同,通过行车路线或者行走路线难以找到处于停放状态的车辆,况且,地下车库面积大,更加难以找到处于停放状态的车辆。因此,需要在进入地下车停放车辆时确定车辆的停放位置信息,以便于在地下车库寻找处于停放状态的车辆。As the number of vehicles increases, the number of driving trips also increases. In particular, when the destination is a public place such as a shopping mall, airport, or train station, the probability of choosing to drive is greater. In order to meet the parking demand, the underground garages in the above public places often have the characteristics of large area, many parking spaces, complex driving routes, and many entrances and exits. For different entrances and exits, the parked vehicles have different relative positions. Once the entrance and exit selected when leaving the underground garage is different from the entrance and exit selected when entering the lower garage to find the vehicle, it is difficult to find the parked vehicle through the driving route or walking route. Moreover, the underground garage has a large area, making it even more difficult to find the parked vehicle. Therefore, it is necessary to determine the parking position information of the vehicle when entering the underground garage to park the vehicle, so as to find the parked vehicle in the underground garage.
在第一种相关技术中,在地下车库部署用于检测停车位置的硬件设备(如,摄像头、传感器等),并且还需要部署与硬件设备配套的定位应用程序(Application,APP),定位APP用于获取停放位置信息,定位APP的服务器可以根据上述硬件设备获取的信息,分析并记录地下车库内各个车辆的停放位置信息。用户可以在手机上安装定位APP,并绑定车牌号、车辆颜色、车辆型号等车辆信息,定位APP响应于用户操作从服务器加载绑定的车辆信息对应的停放位置信息。然而,每个地下车库都需要进行软硬件部署,导致部署成本和维护成本较高,进而导致难以大规模推广。并且,如果不同地下车库部署的定位APP不同,用户还需要安装不同的定位APP,并且每次寻找处于停放状态的车辆都需要启动与地下车库对应的定位APP,导致获取停放位置信息需要消耗较多的时间成本和系统资源成本,继而导致更加难以大规模推广。In the first related technology, hardware devices (such as cameras, sensors, etc.) for detecting parking positions are deployed in underground garages, and positioning applications (Application, APP) supporting the hardware devices need to be deployed. The positioning APP is used to obtain parking position information. The server of the positioning APP can analyze and record the parking position information of each vehicle in the underground garage based on the information obtained by the above hardware devices. Users can install the positioning APP on their mobile phones and bind vehicle information such as license plate number, vehicle color, and vehicle model. The positioning APP loads the parking position information corresponding to the bound vehicle information from the server in response to user operations. However, each underground garage needs to be deployed with hardware and software, resulting in high deployment and maintenance costs, which makes it difficult to promote on a large scale. In addition, if the positioning APPs deployed in different underground garages are different, users also need to install different positioning APPs, and each time they look for a vehicle in a parked state, they need to start the positioning APP corresponding to the underground garage, resulting in more time cost and system resource cost required to obtain parking position information, which makes it more difficult to promote on a large scale.
在第二种相关技术中,可以通过用户使用的手机对车辆进行定位,其中,用户与手机处于同一位置。具体的,如图1所示,在室外场景下,通过GNSS定位模块、IMU传感器和摄像头,进 行自主导航定位,获得停放位置信息。在从室外场景进入地下车库后,GNSS定位模块无法接收到GNSS信号,即,无法获取车辆轮速、车辆角速度等辅助定位信息,无法准确定位车辆的停放位置信息。因此,获取车辆行驶过程中的IMU传感器检测的IMU数据(行驶姿态数据),根据IMU数据通过VDR正向定位递推,以及根据手机摄像头抓取到的图像数据通过视觉定位,获得停放位置信息,其中,IMU传感器包括陀螺仪传感器和加速度传感器。然而,由于IMU性能约束,以及无法获取辅助定位信息,导致通过VDR正向定位递推和视觉定位方式获得的停放位置信息,准确程度较低,甚至获得的停放位置信息与实际停放位置信息偏差较大,无法通过获得的停放位置信息寻找处于停放状态的车辆。同时,由于拍摄视频过程中的手机功耗和手机摆放位置等约束,用户在开车过程中往往不会开启摄像头,也就不能根据图像数据通过视觉定位获得停放位置信息。与第一种相关技术相比,该第二种相关技术无需在地下车库进行软硬件部署,利用手机本身的硬件设备即可对停放的车辆进行定位,因此能够进行大规模推广。In the second related technology, the vehicle can be positioned by the mobile phone used by the user, wherein the user and the mobile phone are in the same location. Specifically, as shown in FIG1 , in an outdoor scene, the GNSS positioning module, IMU sensor and camera are used to perform positioning. Autonomous navigation and positioning are performed to obtain parking position information. After entering the underground garage from the outdoor scene, the GNSS positioning module cannot receive the GNSS signal, that is, it is impossible to obtain auxiliary positioning information such as vehicle wheel speed and vehicle angular velocity, and it is impossible to accurately locate the parking position information of the vehicle. Therefore, the IMU data (driving posture data) detected by the IMU sensor during the driving process of the vehicle is obtained, and the parking position information is obtained by forward positioning recursion through VDR according to the IMU data, and by visual positioning according to the image data captured by the mobile phone camera, wherein the IMU sensor includes a gyroscope sensor and an acceleration sensor. However, due to the performance constraints of the IMU and the inability to obtain auxiliary positioning information, the parking position information obtained by forward positioning recursion through VDR and visual positioning is less accurate, and even the obtained parking position information has a large deviation from the actual parking position information, and it is impossible to find the vehicle in the parked state through the obtained parking position information. At the same time, due to the constraints of mobile phone power consumption and mobile phone placement during video shooting, users often do not turn on the camera during driving, and they cannot obtain parking position information through visual positioning based on image data. Compared with the first related technology, the second related technology does not require the deployment of software and hardware in the underground garage. The parked vehicles can be located using the hardware equipment of the mobile phone itself, so it can be promoted on a large scale.
因此,本申请实施例提供的车辆定位方法,能够解决上述第二种相关技术中获得的停放位置信息的准确程度较低的问题。在车辆驶入地下库后,电子设备无法准确定位车辆实时位置(包括无法准确定位车辆停放位置)的情况下,首先,在检测到车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备获取行走姿态数据,行走姿态数据用于检测用户的行走状态,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器和加速度传感器。然后,电子设备通过以下至少一种方式:无线网络通信(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)技术、卫星定位技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术,对用户所处的位置进行定位,直至获取第一位置的目标定位信息。最后,电子设备根据目标定位信息和行走姿态数据进行反向定位推算,获得用户开始行走的初始位置信息,即,车辆停放位置对应的停放位置信息。Therefore, the vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application can solve the problem of low accuracy of the parking position information obtained in the above-mentioned second related technology. After the vehicle enters the underground garage, when the electronic device cannot accurately locate the real-time position of the vehicle (including the inability to accurately locate the parking position of the vehicle), first, when it is detected that the vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains walking posture data, and the walking posture data is used to detect the walking state of the user. The sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor and an acceleration sensor. Then, the electronic device locates the user's position by at least one of the following methods: wireless network communication (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) technology, satellite positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology, until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained. Finally, the electronic device performs reverse positioning calculation based on the target positioning information and the walking posture data to obtain the initial position information when the user starts walking, that is, the parking position information corresponding to the parking position of the vehicle.
其中,车辆处于停放状态的检测方式可以为检测车辆是否熄火,还可以为检测车辆是否停在停车位上,还可以检测车辆的IMU数据是否指示车辆已停止行进。第一位置是指在对用户所处的位置进行定位的过程中首个能够准确定位的位置。行走姿态数据是指用户从车辆停放位置行走至第一位置的过程中,获取的用户(即电子设备)的IMU数据。Among them, the detection method of the vehicle being in a parked state can be to detect whether the vehicle is turned off, whether the vehicle is parked in a parking space, or whether the IMU data of the vehicle indicates that the vehicle has stopped moving. The first position refers to the first position that can be accurately located in the process of locating the user's position. Walking posture data refers to the IMU data of the user (i.e., the electronic device) obtained during the user's walking from the vehicle parking position to the first position.
其中,检测车辆处于停放状态的电子设备,与获得停放位置信息的电子设备,可以是相同的,也可以是不同的。例如,检测车辆处于停放状态的电子设备为车辆上安装配置的智能车机,获取停放位置信息的电子设备为用户的手机。通过Wi-Fi技术、GNSS定位技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术或地磁匹配技术,进行定位的前提是,电子设备具有对应的硬件模块,如,Wi-Fi模块、GNSS定位模块、全球移动通信系统(Global System for Mobile Communications,GSM)模块、第五代移动通信技术(5th Generation Mobile Communication Technology,5G)模块、蓝牙模块或磁传感器等。Among them, the electronic device that detects whether the vehicle is in a parked state and the electronic device that obtains the parking position information can be the same or different. For example, the electronic device that detects whether the vehicle is in a parked state is a smart car machine installed and configured on the vehicle, and the electronic device that obtains the parking position information is the user's mobile phone. The premise for positioning through Wi-Fi technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology or geomagnetic matching technology is that the electronic device has a corresponding hardware module, such as a Wi-Fi module, a GNSS positioning module, a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) module, a fifth generation mobile communication technology (5G) module, a Bluetooth module or a magnetic sensor.
本申请实施例提供的车辆定位方法,在车辆处于停放状态时无法准确定位车辆停放位置的情况下,在用户下车并行走至可定位位置(第一位置)之后,根据行走过程中的行走姿态数据,确定车辆停放位置。由于可定位位置(第一位置)对应的定位信息是准确的,行走姿态数据也是准确的,因此,确定的车辆停放位置也是准确的,能够提高停放位置信息的准确性。The vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application determines the parking position of the vehicle according to the walking posture data during the walking process after the user gets off the vehicle and walks to the position that can be positioned (the first position), when the parking position of the vehicle cannot be accurately positioned when the vehicle is in the parked state. Since the positioning information corresponding to the position that can be positioned (the first position) is accurate and the walking posture data is also accurate, the determined parking position of the vehicle is also accurate, which can improve the accuracy of the parking position information.
本申请实施例提供的车辆定位方法,可以应用于车辆定位系统。如图2所示,车辆定位系统包括:第一电子设备、第二电子设备、本地服务器和云端服务器。其中,第一电子设备用于检测车辆信息,第二电子设备用于检测用户信息。可以理解的是,用户信息一般为用户的行走信息。在一种情况下,第一电子设备和第二电子设备是同一电子设备,如,第一电子设备是用户使用的手机,第二电子设备也是该用户使用的手机。在另一种情况下,第一电子设备和第二电子设备为不同的电子设备,如,第一电子设备为安装在车辆上的智能车机,第二电子设备为用户使用的手机。The vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a vehicle positioning system. As shown in Figure 2, the vehicle positioning system includes: a first electronic device, a second electronic device, a local server and a cloud server. Among them, the first electronic device is used to detect vehicle information, and the second electronic device is used to detect user information. It can be understood that the user information is generally the user's walking information. In one case, the first electronic device and the second electronic device are the same electronic device, such as the first electronic device is a mobile phone used by the user, and the second electronic device is also a mobile phone used by the user. In another case, the first electronic device and the second electronic device are different electronic devices, such as the first electronic device is an intelligent car machine installed on the vehicle, and the second electronic device is a mobile phone used by the user.
示例性的,第一电子设备,可以是智能车机、手机、平板电脑、智能手表等支持导航和车辆定位的电子设备,第二电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、智能手表等可携带的智能导航和车辆定位的电子设备,本申请实施例对电子设备的具体形式不做特殊限制。Exemplarily, the first electronic device may be an electronic device that supports navigation and vehicle positioning, such as a smart car machine, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a smart watch, etc., and the second electronic device may be a portable electronic device that supports intelligent navigation and vehicle positioning, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a smart watch, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not impose any special restrictions on the specific form of the electronic device.
以下,假设第一电子设备为智能车机,第二电子设备为手机,对车辆定位系统进行说明。In the following, the vehicle positioning system is described assuming that the first electronic device is a smart vehicle machine and the second electronic device is a mobile phone.
第一电子设备包括第一定位模块、第一楼层识别模块、第一无线传输模块和用于获取车辆数 据的第一传感器等。第一电子设备可以通过第一定位模块和第一楼层识别模块获取停放位置信息。第一电子设备可以将加密后的停放位置信息上传至云端服务器,还可以通过第一无线传输模块(如蓝牙模块、Wi-Fi模块等近场通信模块)将停放位置信息发送至第二电子设备。其中,第一定位模块可以为GNSS定位模块,第一楼层识别模块可以根据楼层的指纹数据(可以根据气压值和无线信号强度得到),识别第一电子设备所处的楼层。The first electronic device includes a first positioning module, a first floor recognition module, a first wireless transmission module and a module for obtaining vehicle data. The first electronic device may obtain the parking location information through the first positioning module and the first floor identification module. The first electronic device may upload the encrypted parking location information to the cloud server, and may also send the parking location information to the second electronic device through the first wireless transmission module (such as a near field communication module such as a Bluetooth module and a Wi-Fi module). Among them, the first positioning module may be a GNSS positioning module, and the first floor identification module may identify the floor where the first electronic device is located based on the fingerprint data of the floor (which can be obtained based on the air pressure value and the wireless signal strength).
第二电子设备包括停车位置记录单元、反向找车单元和本地地磁库等。停车位置记录单元包括第二定位模块、第二楼层识别模块、第二无线传输模块和用于获取用户数据的第二传感器,第二传感器可以包括IMU传感器和磁传感器。反向找车单元包括地图应用程序界面、用户界面UI、反向找车定位模块、第二无线传输模块和第二传感器。停车位置记录单元和反向找车单元可以共用第二无线传输模块和第二传感器。第二电子设备可以将第二传感器获取的数据,加密后的上传至云端服务器。本地地磁库接收云端服务器发送楼层的指纹数据。The second electronic device includes a parking position recording unit, a reverse car search unit, and a local geomagnetic library. The parking position recording unit includes a second positioning module, a second floor identification module, a second wireless transmission module, and a second sensor for acquiring user data. The second sensor may include an IMU sensor and a magnetic sensor. The reverse car search unit includes a map application interface, a user interface UI, a reverse car search positioning module, a second wireless transmission module, and a second sensor. The parking position recording unit and the reverse car search unit can share the second wireless transmission module and the second sensor. The second electronic device can upload the encrypted data acquired by the second sensor to the cloud server. The local geomagnetic library receives the fingerprint data of the floor sent by the cloud server.
第二电子设备中的停车位置记录单元可以通过第二定位模块和第二楼层识别模块获取停车位置。第二电子设备还可以在停车过程中,获取第一电子设备和第二电子设备的车辆行驶姿态数据和行人行走姿态数据,根据车辆行驶姿态数据和行人行走姿态数据进行反向定位推算,获取停放位置信息。The parking position recording unit in the second electronic device can obtain the parking position through the second positioning module and the second floor recognition module. The second electronic device can also obtain the vehicle driving posture data and pedestrian walking posture data of the first electronic device and the second electronic device during the parking process, and perform reverse positioning calculation based on the vehicle driving posture data and pedestrian walking posture data to obtain parking position information.
其中,如图3所示,第二电子设备的停车位置记录单元对应的物理硬件可以包括陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器、磁传感器、移动通信模块(包括GSM模块、5G模块等采用蜂窝无线组网方式的通信模块)、Wi-Fi模块、GNSS定位模块、蓝牙模块。第二定位模块中的软件功能子模块可以包括PDR子模块,还可以包括地磁匹配子模块。陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器、磁传感器分别与PDR子模块连接,用于检测行人行走姿态数据,并进行PDR反向定位推算。移动通信模块、Wi-Fi模块、GNSS定位模块、蓝牙模块和地磁传感器,分别与地磁匹配子模块连接用于定位第一位置的目标位置信息。PDR子模块还可以与地磁匹配子模块连接,实现根据地磁数据进行PDR反向定位推算。Among them, as shown in Figure 3, the physical hardware corresponding to the parking position recording unit of the second electronic device may include a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, a magnetic sensor, a mobile communication module (including a GSM module, a 5G module, and other communication modules using a cellular wireless networking method), a Wi-Fi module, a GNSS positioning module, and a Bluetooth module. The software function submodule in the second positioning module may include a PDR submodule and may also include a geomagnetic matching submodule. The gyroscope sensor, the acceleration sensor, and the magnetic sensor are respectively connected to the PDR submodule to detect pedestrian walking posture data and perform PDR reverse positioning calculation. The mobile communication module, the Wi-Fi module, the GNSS positioning module, the Bluetooth module, and the geomagnetic sensor are respectively connected to the geomagnetic matching submodule to locate the target position information of the first position. The PDR submodule can also be connected to the geomagnetic matching submodule to realize PDR reverse positioning calculation based on geomagnetic data.
需要说明的是,第二电子设备还可以在停车过程中,获取第一电子设备的车辆的行驶姿态数据,并检测行人的行走姿态数据,并将行驶姿态数据和行走姿态数据发送到云端服务器,然后,云端服务器根据车辆行驶姿态数据和行人行走姿态数据进行定位解算,获取停放位置信息,最后,云端服务器将停放位置信息发送至第二电子设备。It should be noted that, during the parking process, the second electronic device can also obtain the driving posture data of the vehicle of the first electronic device, detect the walking posture data of the pedestrians, and send the driving posture data and the walking posture data to the cloud server. Then, the cloud server performs positioning and solution based on the vehicle driving posture data and the pedestrian walking posture data to obtain the parking position information. Finally, the cloud server sends the parking position information to the second electronic device.
第二电子设备,可以计算第一信息置信度,和第二信息置信度,第一信息置信度是指通过正向定位推断方法获取的正向停放位置信息的可信程度,第二信息置信度是指通过反向定位推算方法获取的反向停放位置信息的可信程度。在第一信息置信度大于第二信息置信度,或者第一信息置信度大于或等于预置置信度的情况下,确定正向停放位置信息为最终获得的停放位置信息。在第一信息置信度小于或等于第二信息置信度,或者第二信息置信度大于或等于预置置信度的情况下,确定反向停放位置信息为最终获得的停放位置信息。The second electronic device can calculate the first information confidence and the second information confidence, wherein the first information confidence refers to the credibility of the forward parking position information obtained by the forward positioning inference method, and the second information confidence refers to the credibility of the reverse parking position information obtained by the reverse positioning inference method. When the first information confidence is greater than the second information confidence, or the first information confidence is greater than or equal to the preset confidence, the forward parking position information is determined to be the finally obtained parking position information. When the first information confidence is less than or equal to the second information confidence, or the second information confidence is greater than or equal to the preset confidence, the reverse parking position information is determined to be the finally obtained parking position information.
本地服务器,用于对数据库中的存储数据进行预处理。本地服务器包括地磁指纹数据库,地磁指纹数据库用于存储场景地磁数据、楼层识别辅助数据(如,气压、Wi-Fi信号强度等)和地下车库Wi-Fi数据。本地服务器具体可以通过能够定位的车辆位置的附近地库的场景地磁数据和地库楼层数据,并对场景地磁数据和地库楼层数据进行预处理,得到楼层的指纹数据。本地服务器具体还可以将预处理后的数据进行编码、压缩、加密等处理,上传至云端服务器。The local server is used to preprocess the stored data in the database. The local server includes a geomagnetic fingerprint database, which is used to store scene geomagnetic data, floor identification auxiliary data (such as air pressure, Wi-Fi signal strength, etc.) and underground garage Wi-Fi data. The local server can specifically obtain the fingerprint data of the floor by preprocessing the scene geomagnetic data and the underground garage floor data of the nearby underground garage that can locate the vehicle position. The local server can also encode, compress, encrypt and other processes the preprocessed data and upload it to the cloud server.
云端服务器,用于对第一电子设备和第二电子设备上传的车辆行驶姿态数据和行人行走姿态数据进行处理。对于第一电子设备而言,停放位置信息计算方式包括以下至少一项:第一电子设备从云端服务器加载定位数据库中的数据,然后根据加载的数据,获取停放位置信息;云端服务器根据定位数据库中的数据获取停放位置信息,然后将停放位置信息发送至第一电子设备。类似的,对于第二电子设备而言,停放位置信息计算方式包括以下至少一项:第二电子设备从云端服务器加载定位数据库中的数据,然后根据加载的数据,获取停放位置信息;云端服务器根据定位数据库中的数据获取停放位置信息,然后将停放位置信息发送至第二电子设备。The cloud server is used to process the vehicle driving posture data and pedestrian walking posture data uploaded by the first electronic device and the second electronic device. For the first electronic device, the parking position information calculation method includes at least one of the following: the first electronic device loads the data in the positioning database from the cloud server, and then obtains the parking position information based on the loaded data; the cloud server obtains the parking position information based on the data in the positioning database, and then sends the parking position information to the first electronic device. Similarly, for the second electronic device, the parking position information calculation method includes at least one of the following: the second electronic device loads the data in the positioning database from the cloud server, and then obtains the parking position information based on the loaded data; the cloud server obtains the parking position information based on the data in the positioning database, and then sends the parking position information to the second electronic device.
第二电子设备中的反向找车定位模块,在寻找处于停放状态的车辆过程中,可以获取设备位置信息(该设备位置信息为第二电子设备实时定位的位置信息),并将设备位置信息,以及找车 过程中的行走姿态数据,上传至云端服务器。然后云端服务器根据设备位置信息、行走姿态数据和地库的地图信息,推算第二电子设备的实时位置信息,并将实时位置信息下发至第二电子设备。类似的,第二电子设备中的反向找车定位模块,还可以获取设备位置信息,然后根据设备位置信息、找车过程中的行走姿态数据和地下车库的地图信息,推算第二电子设备的实时位置信息。The reverse vehicle location module in the second electronic device can obtain device location information (the device location information is the location information of the second electronic device in real time) during the process of searching for a parked vehicle, and transmit the device location information and the vehicle location information to the second electronic device. The walking posture data during the process is uploaded to the cloud server. Then the cloud server calculates the real-time location information of the second electronic device based on the device location information, the walking posture data and the map information of the underground garage, and sends the real-time location information to the second electronic device. Similarly, the reverse car search and positioning module in the second electronic device can also obtain the device location information, and then calculate the real-time location information of the second electronic device based on the device location information, the walking posture data during the car search process and the map information of the underground garage.
第二电子设备中的用户界面UI,可以嵌入显示地图应用程序界面,并可以在地图应用程序界面显示实时位置信息和停放位置信息,还可以显示人车指引界面,还可以在地图应用程序界面显示的地库地图的基础上,生成找车的规划路线,以便于根据规划路线进行反向找车导航。The user interface UI in the second electronic device can be embedded with a map application interface, and can display real-time location information and parking location information on the map application interface, and can also display a person and vehicle guidance interface. It can also generate a planned route for finding the car based on the basement map displayed on the map application interface, so as to facilitate reverse car navigation according to the planned route.
如此,通过上述车辆定位系统可以对车辆进行实时定位,并且无论地下车库是否能够接收到定位信号都可以生成找车的规划路线,并根据规划路线进行找车导航,能够提高获取停放位置信息的准确性,进而能够提高找车的速度。In this way, the vehicle can be located in real time through the above-mentioned vehicle positioning system, and a planned route for finding the vehicle can be generated regardless of whether the underground garage can receive the positioning signal, and vehicle navigation can be performed according to the planned route, which can improve the accuracy of obtaining parking location information and thus increase the speed of finding the vehicle.
图4示出了电子设备100的硬件结构示意图,该电子设备100可以是上述第一电子设备或第二电子设备。FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device 100 , which may be the first electronic device or the second electronic device mentioned above.
如图4所示,电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,指示器192,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E等。As shown in FIG4 , the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, an antenna 1, an antenna 2, a mobile communication module 150, a wireless communication module 160, an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, an earphone interface 170D, a sensor module 180, a button 190, an indicator 192, a display screen 194, and a subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It is to be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange the components differently. The components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (GPU), an image signal processor (ISP), a controller, a memory, a video codec, a digital signal processor (DSP), a baseband processor, and/or a neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc. Different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100. The controller may generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and the timing signal to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
示例性的,电子设备100的处理器110可以获取行走姿态数据,并指示通过外部存储器接口120连接的存储器缓存行走姿态数据,或者指示内部存储器121缓存行走姿态数据。处理器110还可以判断是否能够准确定位,获取首个能够准确定位的目标定位信息(第一位置),定位方式包括以下至少一项:Wi-Fi技术、卫星定位技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术。处理器110还可以根据目标定位信息,对行走姿态数据进行推算,获得停放位置信息。Exemplarily, the processor 110 of the electronic device 100 can obtain walking posture data, and instruct the memory connected through the external memory interface 120 to cache the walking posture data, or instruct the internal memory 121 to cache the walking posture data. The processor 110 can also determine whether it can be accurately positioned, and obtain the first target positioning information (first position) that can be accurately positioned. The positioning method includes at least one of the following: Wi-Fi technology, satellite positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology. The processor 110 can also calculate the walking posture data based on the target positioning information to obtain the parking position information.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may store instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or cyclically used. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it may be directly called from the memory. This avoids repeated access, reduces the waiting time of the processor 110, and thus improves the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an inter-integrated circuit sound (I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, a general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, a subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and/or a universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, the processor 110 can include multiple I2S buses. The processor 110 can be coupled to the audio module 170 via the I2S bus to achieve communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit an audio signal to the wireless communication module 160 via the I2S interface to achieve the function of answering a call through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块 170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 can be coupled via a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 via the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls via a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160. For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit an audio signal to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate via a DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and a peripheral device. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones. The interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It is understandable that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is only a schematic illustration and does not constitute a structural limitation on the electronic device 100. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve the utilization of antennas. For example, antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless local area network. In some other embodiments, the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communications including 2G/3G/4G/5G, etc., applied to the electronic device 100. The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, a switch, a power amplifier, a low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 may receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, and perform filtering, amplification, and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 may also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 1. In some embodiments, at least some of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be arranged in the processor 110. In some embodiments, at least some of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be arranged in the same device as at least some of the modules of the processor 110.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如Wi-Fi网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),GNSS,调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless communication solutions including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as Wi-Fi network), Bluetooth (BT), GNSS, frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared (IR), etc., which are applied to the electronic device 100. The wireless communication module 160 can be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, modulates the frequency of the electromagnetic wave signal and performs filtering, and sends the processed signal to the processor 110. The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, modulate the frequency of the signal, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括GSM,通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include GSM, general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC, FM, and/or IR technology.
示例性的,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,以使得电子设备可以通过移动网络技术,即根据蜂窝网络的六边形信号覆盖规则,通过接入移动通信网络的位置,获取第一位置的目标定位信息。Exemplarily, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150 so that the electronic device can obtain the target positioning information of the first position through the mobile network technology, that is, according to the hexagonal signal coverage rule of the cellular network, by accessing the location of the mobile communication network.
示例性的,电子设备100的天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,以使得电子设备100可以通过无线网络技术,根据接入无线网络的信号源以及信号强度,获取第一目标位置的目标定位信息。其中,无线网络技术与无线网络的连接方式相适应。电子设备100可以通过一项无线网络技术获 取目标定位信息,还可以通过多项无线网络技术通过交叉定位方式获取目标定位信息。需要说明的是,无线网络的连接方式包括以下至少一项:GNSS、BT、WLAN、NFC和IR。Exemplarily, the antenna 2 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can obtain the target positioning information of the first target position through the wireless network technology according to the signal source and signal strength of the wireless network accessed. The wireless network technology is adapted to the connection mode of the wireless network. The target positioning information can be obtained by cross-positioning multiple wireless network technologies. It should be noted that the connection method of the wireless network includes at least one of the following: GNSS, BT, WLAN, NFC and IR.
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements the display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, which connects the display screen 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. The processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
示例性的,电子设备100通过显示屏194可以显示目标定位信息,还可显示根据车辆行进过程中获取的车辆行驶姿态数据得到的行驶推算路径,还可以显示根据行驶推算路径获得的停放位置信息,还可以显示根据行走姿态数据得到的行走推算路径,还可以显示根据行走推算路径获得的停放位置信息。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 can display target positioning information through the display screen 194, and can also display the driving calculated path obtained based on the vehicle driving posture data obtained during the vehicle's movement, and can also display the parking position information obtained based on the driving calculated path, and can also display the walking calculated path obtained based on the walking posture data, and can also display the parking position information obtained based on the walking calculated path.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD),有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(Active-Matrix Organic Light Emitting Diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(Flex Light-Emitting Diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(Quantum Dot Light Emitting Diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (AMOLED), a flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, a quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频、传感数据等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. For example, files such as music, video, and sensor data can be stored in the external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 121 can be used to store computer executable program codes, which include instructions. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running the instructions stored in the internal memory 121. The internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the program storage area may store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc. The data storage area may store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, a phone book, etc.), etc. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions such as music playing and recording through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone jack 170D, and the application processor.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A can be set on the display screen 194. There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc. The capacitive pressure sensor can be a parallel plate including at least two conductive materials. When a force acts on the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the touch operation intensity according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 can also calculate the touch position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities can correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100. In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes (i.e., x, y, and z axes) can be determined by the gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for anti-shake shooting. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle of the electronic device 100 shaking, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist in positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。 The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip phone, the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip cover according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, the flip cover can be automatically unlocked.
示例性的,内部存储器121可以缓存行走姿态数据,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器180B、加速度传感器180E和磁传感器180D。Exemplarily, the internal memory 121 may cache walking posture data, and the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyro sensor 180B, an acceleration sensor 180E, and a magnetic sensor 180D.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in all directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of the electronic device and is applied to applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching and pedometers.
基于图4所示的电子设备100实现本申请实施例中的车辆定位方法时,电子设备通过天线1和移动通信模块150,或者天线2和无线通信模块160无法准确定位车辆实时位置之后,电子设备通过USB接口130、无线通信模块160、陀螺仪传感器180B和加速度传感器180E,检测车辆是否处于停放状态。在车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备通过陀螺仪传感器180B,磁传感器180D和加速度传感器180E等中的一项或多项,检测行走姿态数据,电子设备将行走姿态数据缓存至通过外部存储器接口120连接的外部存储卡,或者,将行走姿态数据缓存至内部存储器121。然后,电子设备通过天线1和移动通信模块150对用户的实时位置进行定位,直至获取第一位置的目标定位信息;或者通过天线2和无线通信模块160对用户的实时位置进行定位,直至获取第一位置的目标定位信息。再者,电子设备的处理器110根据目标定位信息,对行走姿态数据进行反向定位推算,获得停放位置信息。When the vehicle positioning method in the embodiment of the present application is implemented based on the electronic device 100 shown in FIG4, after the electronic device fails to accurately locate the real-time position of the vehicle through the antenna 1 and the mobile communication module 150, or the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160, the electronic device detects whether the vehicle is in a parked state through the USB interface 130, the wireless communication module 160, the gyroscope sensor 180B and the acceleration sensor 180E. When the vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device detects the walking posture data through one or more of the gyroscope sensor 180B, the magnetic sensor 180D and the acceleration sensor 180E, and the electronic device caches the walking posture data to an external memory card connected through the external memory interface 120, or caches the walking posture data to the internal memory 121. Then, the electronic device locates the real-time position of the user through the antenna 1 and the mobile communication module 150 until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained; or locates the real-time position of the user through the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160 until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained. Furthermore, the processor 110 of the electronic device performs reverse positioning calculation on the walking posture data according to the target positioning information to obtain the parking position information.
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本发明实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-core architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture. In the embodiment of the present invention, the Android system of the layered architecture is taken as an example to exemplify the software structure of the electronic device 100.
图5是本发明实施例的电子设备的软件结构示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the software structure of the electronic device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android Runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, each with a clear role and division of labor. The layers communicate with each other through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: the application layer, the application framework layer, the Android runtime (Android Runtime) and system library, and the kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图5所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。As shown in FIG. 5 , the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message, etc.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides application programming interface (API) and programming framework for the applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图5所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in FIG. 5 , the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a telephony manager, a resource manager, a notification manager, and the like.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。The window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the display screen size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. The data may include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying images, etc. The view system can be used to build applications. A display interface can be composed of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text notification icon can include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying images.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100, such as management of call status (including connecting, hanging up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for applications, such as localized strings, icons, images, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar. It can be used to convey notification-type messages and can disappear automatically after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the system top status bar in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as notifications of applications running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, a text message is displayed in the status bar, a prompt sound is emitted, an electronic device vibrates, an indicator light flashes, etc.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android Runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。其中,核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android Runtime is responsible for scheduling and management of the Android system. Among them, the core library contains two parts: one part is the function that the Java language needs to call, and the other part is the Android core library.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全 和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in the virtual machine. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to manage the object life cycle, stack management, thread management, security, etc. And exception management, as well as garbage collection and other functions.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。The system library can include multiple functional modules, such as surface manager, media library, 3D graphics processing library (such as OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (such as SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provide the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。A 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawings.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
基于图5所示的电子设备100实现本申请实施例中的车辆定位方法时,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。电子设备通过内核层驱动陀螺仪传感器180B和加速度传感器180E检测行驶姿态数据,以及通过内核层驱动通过天线2和无线通信模块160中的GNSS对电子设备进行实时定位。在电子设备无法准确定位的情况下,并在车辆处于停放状态的情况下,通过应用程序框架层中的通知管理器指示获取停放位置信息。电子设备可以在应用程序层运行定位相关程序,通过内核驱动层驱动陀螺仪传感器180B,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E检测行走姿态数据,通过内核层驱动通过天线1和移动通信模块150中的GNSS对第一位置进行实时定位,以及通过内核层驱动通过天线2和无线通信模块160中的GNSS对第一位置进行实时定位。电子设备通过应用程序框架层中的内容提供器获取行走姿态数据和目标定位信息。通过Android Runtime和系统库,根据行走姿态数据和目标定位信息,进行反向定位推算,获得停放位置信息。电子设备通过应用程序框架层中的可视控件在地图上显示停放位置信息。When the vehicle positioning method in the embodiment of the present application is implemented based on the electronic device 100 shown in FIG5 , the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 is exemplified. The electronic device drives the gyro sensor 180B and the acceleration sensor 180E through the kernel layer to detect the driving posture data, and drives the GNSS in the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160 through the kernel layer to perform real-time positioning of the electronic device. When the electronic device cannot be accurately positioned and the vehicle is in a parked state, the parking position information is obtained through the notification manager in the application framework layer. The electronic device can run positioning-related programs in the application layer, drive the gyro sensor 180B, the magnetic sensor 180D, and the acceleration sensor 180E through the kernel driver layer to detect the walking posture data, drive the GNSS in the antenna 1 and the mobile communication module 150 through the kernel layer to perform real-time positioning of the first position, and drive the GNSS in the antenna 2 and the wireless communication module 160 through the kernel layer to perform real-time positioning of the first position. The electronic device obtains the walking posture data and the target positioning information through the content provider in the application framework layer. Through the Android Runtime and the system library, reverse positioning is calculated according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information to obtain the parking position information. The electronic device displays the parking location information on a map through visual controls in the application framework layer.
在对车辆定位之后,还可以基于图2所示的第二电子设备中的反向找车单元查找停放位置信息。具体的,基于图5所示的电子设备100实现查找停放位置信息时,电子设备通过应用程序层可以运行定位相关程序,并通过应用程序框架层中的内容提供器获取行走姿态数据和行走起点位置信息。然后,电子设备通过Android Runtime和系统库,根据行走起点位置信息、停车定位信息和实时路况信息(根据行走姿态数据得到的),生成最优路径;电子设备还可以通过Android Runtime实现导航应用程序运行的其他逻辑规则,以及为导航应用程序的正常运行提供兜底管理规则。最后,电子设备通过应用程序框架层中的资源管理器存储地图数据,电子设备还可以通过应用程序框架层中的可视控件在地图上显示最优路径、实时路况信息和停车定位信息。After locating the vehicle, the parking location information can also be searched based on the reverse vehicle search unit in the second electronic device shown in FIG2. Specifically, when searching for parking location information based on the electronic device 100 shown in FIG5, the electronic device can run positioning-related programs through the application layer, and obtain walking posture data and walking starting point location information through the content provider in the application framework layer. Then, the electronic device generates the optimal path based on the walking starting point location information, parking positioning information and real-time traffic information (obtained based on the walking posture data) through the Android Runtime and the system library; the electronic device can also implement other logical rules for the operation of the navigation application through the Android Runtime, and provide a bottom-up management rule for the normal operation of the navigation application. Finally, the electronic device stores the map data through the resource manager in the application framework layer, and the electronic device can also display the optimal path, real-time traffic information and parking location information on the map through the visual controls in the application framework layer.
在一些实施例中,在用户停车场景中,用户驾驶目标车辆驶入目标地下车库,其中,用户使用手机,且目标车辆上安装智能车机。在室外场景下,能够接收到GNSS信号,通过车机GNSS定位模块、IMU传感器和摄像对目标车辆进行定位。如图6所示,在从室外场景进入地下车库后,GNSS定位模块,不能接收到卫星信号,因此,根据IMU传感器检测的IMU数据(车辆行驶姿态数据)通过VDR正向定位递推,以及根据摄像头抓取到的图像数据通过视觉定位,获得停放位置信息。需要说明的是,IMU性能约束,以及无法获取辅助定位信息,导致通过正向定位推算方式获得停放位置信息往往是不准确的。In some embodiments, in a user parking scenario, the user drives the target vehicle into the target underground garage, wherein the user uses a mobile phone and an intelligent vehicle computer is installed on the target vehicle. In an outdoor scenario, the GNSS signal can be received, and the target vehicle is positioned through the vehicle computer GNSS positioning module, IMU sensor and camera. As shown in Figure 6, after entering the underground garage from the outdoor scene, the GNSS positioning module cannot receive satellite signals. Therefore, the IMU data (vehicle driving posture data) detected by the IMU sensor is forward positioned recursively through the VDR, and the image data captured by the camera is visually positioned to obtain the parking position information. It should be noted that the performance constraints of the IMU and the inability to obtain auxiliary positioning information result in the parking position information obtained by forward positioning calculation being often inaccurate.
在另一些实施例中,如图6所示,在用户停车场景中,以用户的手机为电子设备,手机可以在车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,开始通过反向定位推算方式获取停放位置信息。首先,在用户下车后,手机获取行走姿态数据。然后,在用户离开车辆一段距离后,手机通过以下至少一种预设定位技术方式:Wi-Fi技术、卫星定位技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术,进行定位直至获取第一位置的目标定位信息。然后,根据目标定位信息和行走姿态数据进行反向定位推算,获得用户的下车位置信息,即通过间接推算的方式,获取目标车辆的停放位置信息。In other embodiments, as shown in FIG6 , in a user parking scenario, the user's mobile phone is used as an electronic device, and the mobile phone can start to obtain the parking position information through reverse positioning and calculation when the vehicle is parked and the parking position information cannot be obtained. First, after the user gets off the vehicle, the mobile phone obtains the walking posture data. Then, after the user leaves the vehicle for a certain distance, the mobile phone uses at least one of the following preset positioning technologies: Wi-Fi technology, satellite positioning technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology to locate until the target positioning information of the first position is obtained. Then, reverse positioning and calculation are performed based on the target positioning information and the walking posture data to obtain the user's getting off position information, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained by indirect calculation.
以下将以电子设备是手机为例,针对目标车辆驶入无法通过常规定位技术(如卫星定位技术)准确定位的停车区域(如地下车库)场景,云端服务器用于提供场景地磁数据、楼层识别辅助数据(如,气压、Wi-Fi信号强度等)和地下车库中的Wi-Fi数据,电子设备用于对处于停放状态的车辆进行定位,对本申请实施例提供的车辆定位方法进行说明。如图7所示,该方法可以包括如 下步骤S701-S704。The following will take the electronic device being a mobile phone as an example, for a scene where a target vehicle enters a parking area (such as an underground garage) that cannot be accurately located by conventional positioning technology (such as satellite positioning technology), the cloud server is used to provide scene geomagnetic data, floor recognition auxiliary data (such as air pressure, Wi-Fi signal strength, etc.) and Wi-Fi data in the underground garage, and the electronic device is used to locate the parked vehicle, to illustrate the vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7 , the method may include the following: Next steps S701-S704.
S701、在目标车辆行进过程中,电子设备响应于用户输入的界面触发操作,在车辆定位界面显示目标车辆的位置信息。S701. When a target vehicle is moving, the electronic device displays the location information of the target vehicle on a vehicle positioning interface in response to an interface trigger operation input by a user.
其中,目标车辆是用户乘坐或者用户驾驶的车辆。电子设备是用户使用的、通常是便于携带的设备,根据用户对电子设备的依赖程度,在本申请实施例中,可以认为电子设备与用户所处的位置是相同的,即,两者的位置偏差小于预置阈值。可以理解的是,在车辆行驶过程中,可以认为目标车辆、电子设备与用户所处的位置是相同的,即,三者的位置偏差小于预置阈值。The target vehicle is a vehicle that the user is riding in or driving. The electronic device is a device that is used by the user and is usually portable. According to the degree of dependence of the user on the electronic device, in the embodiment of the present application, it can be considered that the electronic device and the user are in the same position, that is, the position deviation of the two is less than the preset threshold. It can be understood that during the driving process of the vehicle, the target vehicle, the electronic device and the user can be considered to be in the same position, that is, the position deviation of the three is less than the preset threshold.
值得说明的是,用户是指乘坐或驾驶车辆,且需要得到停放位置信息的人,用户与用于反向定位推算的电子设备处于同一位置。也就是说,随着用户移动得到的用户相关数据(如,行走姿态数据、目标定位信息、参考位置信息),与用户携带的电子设备移动得到的设备相关数据(如,行走姿态数据、目标定位信息、参考位置信息)是一致的。It is worth noting that a user refers to a person who rides or drives a vehicle and needs to obtain parking location information, and the user and the electronic device used for reverse positioning are in the same location. In other words, the user-related data (such as walking posture data, target positioning information, reference location information) obtained as the user moves is consistent with the device-related data (such as walking posture data, target positioning information, reference location information) obtained as the electronic device carried by the user moves.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以在车辆定位界面显示包含目标车辆的位置信息的地图信息。例如,目标车辆在地区A城市B街道C的商场D的地下车库,地图信息可以包括地区A的所有城市,还可以包括城市B的所有街道,还可以包括街道C覆盖的所有商场,还可以包括商场D的全部建筑结构图。在本申请实施例中,在地图信息包含当前车位置的情况下,对地图信息所包含的物理地域范围不做作限定。如此,通过车辆定位界面显示的地图信息的物理地域范围的可变性,能够避免当目标车辆的行驶的时间较长,距离目的地较远的情况下,显示地图范围较小,用户不熟悉附加地图对位置信息无感,无法在行驶过程中对路况、路线等信息进行判别;相应的,还能够避免当目标车辆距离目的地较近的情况下,显示地图范围较大,用户无法通过看清地图中的详细信息,增加用户驾驶车辆抵达目的地的难度。In some embodiments, the electronic device can display map information containing the location information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface. For example, the target vehicle is in the underground garage of the shopping mall D on the street C of the city B in the region A. The map information may include all cities in the region A, all streets in the city B, all shopping malls covered by the street C, and all architectural structure diagrams of the shopping mall D. In the embodiment of the present application, when the map information includes the current vehicle position, the physical geographical scope contained in the map information is not artificially limited. In this way, the variability of the physical geographical scope of the map information displayed on the vehicle positioning interface can avoid the situation where the target vehicle has been traveling for a long time and is far from the destination, the display map range is small, the user is not familiar with the additional map and has no sense of location information, and cannot judge the road conditions, routes and other information during driving; accordingly, it can also avoid the situation where the target vehicle is close to the destination, the display map range is large, the user cannot see the detailed information in the map clearly, and the difficulty of the user driving the vehicle to the destination is increased.
在一些实施例中,用户在室外场景驾驶目标车辆的过程中,电子设备能够对目标车辆进行实时定位,电子设备能够准确定位目标车辆的实时位置信息的情况下,将实时位置新确定为目标车辆的位置信息,在车辆定位界面显示位置信息。此时,用户和电子设备都处于目标车辆上,目标车辆、用户和电子设备可以认为处于同一位置,即实时位置信息为目标车辆、用户和电子设备的位置信息。示例性的,如图8所示,假设目标车辆从始发点E出发,前往目的地D(商场D),在目标车辆行驶到路口F时,电子设备在车辆定位界面显示目标车辆处于路口F。In some embodiments, when the user is driving the target vehicle in an outdoor scene, the electronic device can locate the target vehicle in real time. When the electronic device can accurately locate the real-time location information of the target vehicle, the real-time location is newly determined as the location information of the target vehicle, and the location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. At this time, the user and the electronic device are both on the target vehicle, and the target vehicle, the user and the electronic device can be considered to be in the same position, that is, the real-time location information is the location information of the target vehicle, the user and the electronic device. Exemplary, as shown in Figure 8, assuming that the target vehicle starts from the starting point E and goes to the destination D (shopping mall D), when the target vehicle drives to the intersection F, the electronic device displays the target vehicle at the intersection F on the vehicle positioning interface.
在另一些实施例中,用户在地下车库场景驾驶目标车辆的过程中,由于存在无信号或信号干扰的情况下,电子设备不能够准确定位目标车辆的位置信息,因此,电子设备在车辆定位界面显示的目标车辆的位置信息,可以为范围位置信息。示例性的,范围位置信息可以在地下车库的入口位置(目标车辆能够进行准确定位的位置)的基础上,根据预置偏差范围得到。范围位置信息还可以是地下车库的入口位置对应的地下车库的位置。In other embodiments, when the user is driving the target vehicle in an underground garage scene, the electronic device cannot accurately locate the location information of the target vehicle due to the absence of a signal or signal interference. Therefore, the location information of the target vehicle displayed by the electronic device on the vehicle positioning interface may be range location information. Exemplarily, the range location information may be obtained based on the entrance position of the underground garage (the position where the target vehicle can be accurately located) according to a preset deviation range. The range location information may also be the location of the underground garage corresponding to the entrance position of the underground garage.
需要说明的是,范围位置信息可以通过预置标识标记,其中,预置标识方式可以为圆圈标识、矩形标识、三角标识等能够包含一定范围的标识。It should be noted that the range location information can be marked by a preset mark, wherein the preset mark can be a circle mark, a rectangle mark, a triangle mark, or other mark that can cover a certain range.
可以理解的是,电子设备根据位置信息的定位精度不同,预置标识标记的范围也不相同。可以理解的是,该圆圈标识还可以通过改变线条颜色、线条粗细、闪烁等方式突出显示。在车辆定位界面显示的地图信息与目标车辆位置的比例尺较大的情况下,设置该圆圈标识在车辆定位界面上显示的大小相同。在车辆定位界面显示的地图信息与目标车辆位置的比例尺较小的情况下,设置该圆圈标识在车辆定位界面上随着地图信息与目标车辆的比例尺的变化而变化。如此,通过预置标识可以提示用户目标车辆的相对位置,以便于用户根据相对位置调整驾驶状态,如行驶速度、行驶路径、是否加油等。It is understandable that the range of the preset identification mark of the electronic device is different according to the different positioning accuracy of the location information. It is understandable that the circle mark can also be highlighted by changing the line color, line thickness, flashing, etc. In the case where the scale of the map information displayed on the vehicle positioning interface is larger than that of the target vehicle position, the circle mark is set to be the same size as displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. In the case where the scale of the map information displayed on the vehicle positioning interface is smaller than that of the target vehicle position, the circle mark is set to change on the vehicle positioning interface as the scale of the map information and the target vehicle changes. In this way, the relative position of the target vehicle can be prompted to the user through the preset mark, so that the user can adjust the driving status according to the relative position, such as driving speed, driving path, whether to refuel, etc.
示例性的,在车辆定位界面上显示地区A的所有城市的情况下,圆圈标识的直径为1厘米;在车辆定位界面上显示街道C覆盖的所有商场的情况下,圆圈标识的直径也为1厘米。在车辆定位界面上显示商场D的地下车库的情况下,圆圈标识的直径与地下车库的车位大小相适应。For example, when all cities in region A are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, the diameter of the circle mark is 1 cm; when all shopping malls covered by street C are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, the diameter of the circle mark is also 1 cm. When the underground garage of shopping mall D is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, the diameter of the circle mark is adapted to the size of the parking space in the underground garage.
示例性的,电子设备可能无法准确定位目标车辆的实时位置信息,如图9中的(a)所示,在车辆定位界面显示圆圈标识,在圆圈标识内包括的位置信息,可以为目标车辆所在商场D。如图9中的(b)所示,在车辆定位界面显示圆圈标识,在圆圈标识内包括的位置信息,还可以为不准确的实时位置信息。如图9中的(c)所示,在车辆定位界面显示圆圈标识,在圆圈标识内包括的 位置信息还可以为在不准确的实时定位信息的基础上,再根据预置偏差范围得到的目标车辆的位置范围信息。For example, the electronic device may not be able to accurately locate the real-time location information of the target vehicle. As shown in (a) of FIG9 , a circle mark is displayed on the vehicle location interface, and the location information included in the circle mark may be the mall D where the target vehicle is located. As shown in (b) of FIG9 , a circle mark is displayed on the vehicle location interface, and the location information included in the circle mark may also be inaccurate real-time location information. As shown in (c) of FIG9 , a circle mark is displayed on the vehicle location interface, and the location information included in the circle mark may be inaccurate real-time location information. The position information may also be the position range information of the target vehicle obtained based on the inaccurate real-time positioning information and according to a preset deviation range.
在一些实施例中,触发操作可以用于打开定位软件,触发在车辆定位界面显示目标车辆的位置信息。在本申请实施例中,界面触发操作可以是通过机械按键输入的按键触发操作(如,同时长按放大音量键和缩小音量键),可以是通过触控屏输入的预置操作或预置手势的屏幕触发操作,还可以是通过摄像头采集到的特定图像的图像识别触发操作,还可以是通过音频模块接收到的预置语音的语音触发操作,还可以其他电子设备发送的无线触发操作。In some embodiments, the trigger operation can be used to open the positioning software and trigger the display of the target vehicle's location information on the vehicle positioning interface. In the embodiment of the present application, the interface trigger operation can be a key trigger operation input through a mechanical key (e.g., long pressing the volume up key and the volume down key at the same time), a preset operation input through a touch screen or a screen trigger operation of a preset gesture, an image recognition trigger operation of a specific image captured by a camera, a voice trigger operation of a preset voice received by an audio module, or a wireless trigger operation sent by other electronic devices.
在一些实施例中,在接收界面触发操作之前,电子设备可以显示的界面,包括以下任一项:车辆位置显示界面、视频播放界面、即时聊天界面、游戏界面、导航界面和桌面。In some embodiments, before receiving an interface trigger operation, the electronic device may display an interface including any of the following: a vehicle position display interface, a video playback interface, an instant chat interface, a game interface, a navigation interface, and a desktop.
S702、电子设备在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息,并获取行走姿态数据。S702: When the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked, it displays positioning indication information on the vehicle positioning interface and obtains walking posture data.
其中,行走姿态数据,即为电子设备的行走姿态数据,也为用户的行走姿态数据。The walking posture data refers to the walking posture data of the electronic device and also the walking posture data of the user.
在本申请实施例中,针对目标车辆驶入无法通过常规定位技术(如卫星定位技术)准确定位的停车区域(如地下车库)场景,因此,在目标车辆行进过程中,电子设备在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取用户离车后的行走姿态数据。In an embodiment of the present application, for a scenario in which a target vehicle enters a parking area (such as an underground garage) that cannot be accurately located by conventional positioning technology (such as satellite positioning technology), during the movement of the target vehicle, the electronic device obtains the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle when it detects that the target vehicle is parked and the parking location information cannot be obtained.
在一些实施例中,电子设备检测目标车辆处于停放状态,可以通过以下至少一种方式:检测到目标车辆通过预置方式熄火,检测到目标车辆停留在车位上,接收到预置语音消息(预置语音消息可以为倒车雷达播放的语音消息)等等。需要说明的是,用户驾驶目标车辆的过程中,可能由于目标车辆发生故障、怠速、过温保护、操作不当等原因被动熄火,也可能由于用户主动操作(该主动操作与用户需求一致)而主动熄火,因此,需要设置在检测到目标车辆通过预置方式熄火时确定目标车辆处于停放状态,以避免误判。In some embodiments, the electronic device may detect that the target vehicle is in a parked state in at least one of the following ways: detecting that the target vehicle is turned off in a preset manner, detecting that the target vehicle is parked in a parking space, receiving a preset voice message (the preset voice message may be a voice message played by a reversing radar), etc. It should be noted that during the process of the user driving the target vehicle, the target vehicle may be passively turned off due to a malfunction, idling, over-temperature protection, improper operation, etc., or it may be actively turned off due to an active operation by the user (the active operation is consistent with the user's needs). Therefore, it is necessary to set the target vehicle to be determined to be in a parked state when the target vehicle is detected to be turned off in a preset manner to avoid misjudgment.
示例性的,电子设备检测目标车辆处于停放状态,还可以根据车辆行驶姿态数据进行判断。车辆行驶姿态数据可以包括通过陀螺仪传感器和加速度传感器检测到的传感数据。在连续时间段内车辆行驶姿态数据的角速度为0,加速度为0的情况下,可以确定目标车辆处于停放状态。Exemplarily, the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is in a parked state, and can also make a judgment based on the vehicle driving posture data. The vehicle driving posture data may include sensor data detected by a gyroscope sensor and an acceleration sensor. When the angular velocity of the vehicle driving posture data is 0 and the acceleration is 0 in a continuous time period, it can be determined that the target vehicle is in a parked state.
可以理解的是,车辆行驶姿态数据可以是在车辆行进过程中,电子设备中的传感器检测到的。行驶姿态数据还可以是在车辆行进过程中,目标车辆的智能车机获取的。智能车机在与电子设备可以通过有线方式连接,还可以通过BT、IR和NFC等近场通信方式连接。It is understandable that the vehicle driving posture data may be detected by sensors in electronic devices during the vehicle's travel. The driving posture data may also be acquired by the target vehicle's smart car machine during the vehicle's travel. The smart car machine may be connected to the electronic device via a wired connection or via near field communication such as BT, IR, and NFC.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备可以在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且采用预置定位技术无法获得停放位置信息,并且检测到电子设备离开目标车辆的情况下,获取行走姿态数据。在目标车辆处于停放状态时即刻开始获取行走姿态数据,能够避免获取不能作为停放位置信息依据的行走姿态数据,减少资源浪费,减少根据行走姿态数据获得停放位置信息的数据处理时间,进而提高获得停放位置信息的速度。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can obtain walking posture data when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained by using the preset positioning technology, and when it is detected that the electronic device has left the target vehicle. When the target vehicle is in a parked state, the walking posture data is immediately obtained, which can avoid obtaining walking posture data that cannot be used as a basis for parking position information, reduce resource waste, and reduce the data processing time for obtaining parking position information based on walking posture data, thereby increasing the speed of obtaining parking position information.
在一些实施例中,电子设备检测用户是否离车,可以通过以下至少一种方式:检测到与目标车辆的连接(包括蓝牙连接和USB连接)由连接状态变化为切断状态;或者,接收到预置传感信息,传感信息用于指示目标车辆上的用户安全带从佩戴状态转变为解开状态;或者,检测到用户离车后的行走姿态数据包括初始姿态数据和指示姿态数据;其中,初始姿态数据是指与第一时间段对应的行走姿态数据,第一时间段的开始时刻为检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的时刻;指示姿态数据与初始姿态数据的差异值大于第一预置阈值。In some embodiments, the electronic device detects whether the user leaves the vehicle in at least one of the following ways: detecting that the connection with the target vehicle (including Bluetooth connection and USB connection) changes from a connected state to a disconnected state; or, receiving preset sensor information, the sensor information is used to indicate that the user's seat belt on the target vehicle changes from a worn state to an unfastened state; or, detecting that the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle includes initial posture data and indicated posture data; wherein the initial posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, and the start time of the first time period is the time when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the difference between the indicated posture data and the initial posture data is greater than a first preset threshold.
示例性的,电子设备的智能传感集线器SensorHub模块,可以检测到电子设备与目标车辆之间的蓝牙连接是否为切断。电子设备从车载支架上被取下会造成设备姿态产生明显变化。For example, the smart sensor hub module of the electronic device can detect whether the Bluetooth connection between the electronic device and the target vehicle is disconnected. When the electronic device is removed from the vehicle bracket, the posture of the device will change significantly.
在另一些实施例中,如果电子设备获取的行走姿态数据仅包括初始姿态数据,那么说明用户没有离开目标车辆开始行走,或者说明用户没有携带电子设备离开目标车辆开始行走,在此情况下,无法根据行走姿态数据获得停放位置信息。如果电子设备获取的行走姿态数据包括初始姿态数据和指示姿态数据,那么说明用户携带电子设备离开目标车辆开始行走,在此情况下,能够根据行走姿态数据获得停放位置信息。In other embodiments, if the walking posture data acquired by the electronic device only includes the initial posture data, it means that the user has not left the target vehicle to start walking, or it means that the user has not left the target vehicle with the electronic device to start walking. In this case, the parking position information cannot be obtained according to the walking posture data. If the walking posture data acquired by the electronic device includes the initial posture data and the indicating posture data, it means that the user has left the target vehicle with the electronic device to start walking. In this case, the parking position information can be obtained according to the walking posture data.
其中,电子设备与目标车辆的连接方式包括蓝牙、红外、Wi-Fi热点等无线连接方式,以及光纤、双绞线等有线连接方式。预置传感信息可以是通过压力传感器获取的压力传感信息。初始 姿态数据是指与第一时间段对应的行走姿态数据,第一时间段的开始时刻为检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的时刻;指示姿态数据是指与初始姿态数据相比,差异值大于第一预置阈值的行走姿态数据。The connection method between the electronic device and the target vehicle includes wireless connection methods such as Bluetooth, infrared, Wi-Fi hotspot, etc., and wired connection methods such as optical fiber, twisted pair, etc. The preset sensor information can be pressure sensor information obtained by a pressure sensor. The posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, and the starting time of the first time period is the time when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the indication posture data refers to the walking posture data whose difference value is greater than the first preset threshold compared with the initial posture data.
可以理解的是,电子设备检测到目标车辆处于停放状态后,将在车内停留的时间段(用户在车内整理随身携带的东西、整体着装等,耗费的时间段)获取的行走姿态数据确定为初始姿态数据。指示姿态数据,是指与初始姿态数据具有明显差异的姿态数据,获取到指示姿态数据,即说明用户开始行走。It is understandable that after the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked, it determines the walking posture data obtained during the time period of staying in the vehicle (the time period spent by the user in the vehicle to organize the things he carries with him, dress himself, etc.) as the initial posture data. The indicated posture data refers to the posture data that is significantly different from the initial posture data. The acquisition of the indicated posture data indicates that the user has started walking.
还可以理解的是,初始姿态数据可以包括预置磁场数据,预置磁场数据为发生变化的情况下,可以确定电子设备的位置未发送移动,也就是用户没有离开目标车辆开始行走。在本申请实施例中,由于目标车辆的空间有限,因此,对于在目标车辆内部的磁场数据的变化忽略不计。It can also be understood that the initial posture data may include preset magnetic field data. If the preset magnetic field data changes, it can be determined that the position of the electronic device has not moved, that is, the user has not left the target vehicle to start walking. In the embodiment of the present application, since the space of the target vehicle is limited, the change of the magnetic field data inside the target vehicle is ignored.
本申请中,电子设备可以在通过至少两种方式都判断出用户离车的情况下,才能确定用户离车,以此提高确定用户是否离车的准确性。In the present application, the electronic device can determine that the user has left the car only when it is determined that the user has left the car in at least two ways, thereby improving the accuracy of determining whether the user has left the car.
如此,通过设置多种方式确定用户是否离车,能够避免由于目标车辆所处环境或电子设备硬件设备状态对判断结果的影响,进而能够提高确定用户是否离车的准确性。In this way, by setting up multiple methods to determine whether the user has left the vehicle, the influence of the environment of the target vehicle or the hardware status of the electronic device on the judgment result can be avoided, thereby improving the accuracy of determining whether the user has left the vehicle.
在一些实施例中,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息。其中,参考位置信息是指采用预设定位技术无法获得目标车辆的停放位置信息的情况下,目标车辆可能处于的位置,或者位置范围。In some embodiments, when it is detected that the target vehicle is parked and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. The reference position information refers to the possible position or position range of the target vehicle when the parking position information of the target vehicle cannot be obtained by using the preset positioning technology.
如此,在车辆定位界面上同时显示定位置指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息,以提示用户当前处于未得到目标车辆的车辆停放信息的状态,同时也能够提示用户当前位置为不能准确定位位置。显示参考位置信息,能够标记目标车辆的大概位置,避免由于用户遗忘目标车辆的停放位置,并且无法通过GPS定位目标车辆位置,导致难以找到目标车辆。In this way, the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the target vehicle parking information is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned. Displaying the reference position information can mark the approximate position of the target vehicle, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
其中,定位指示信息用于指示正在定位目标车辆的停放位置信息,定位指示信息的指示方式可以为以下至少一项:提示文字、文字提示框、图像提示框和提示标识。The positioning indication information is used to indicate that the parking position information of the target vehicle is being positioned, and the indication method of the positioning indication information can be at least one of the following: prompt text, text prompt box, image prompt box and prompt mark.
可以理解的是,电子设备可以响应于用户操作,设置车辆定位界面处于后台运行状态,同时,以悬浮窗方式显示定位指示信息,直至获得停放位置信息。It is understandable that the electronic device can respond to user operations and set the vehicle positioning interface to run in the background, and at the same time, display the positioning indication information in a floating window until the parking location information is obtained.
示例性的,定位指示信息包括指示标识,在图9中的(b)的基础上,如图10所示,电子设备可以在车辆定位界面显示刷新标识,该刷新标识通过动态旋转方式表示还没有通过反向定位推算方法获取停放位置信息。刷新标识可以覆盖整个车辆定位界面,并设置透明度为80%。Exemplarily, the positioning indication information includes an indication mark. Based on (b) in FIG9 , as shown in FIG10 , the electronic device may display a refresh mark on the vehicle positioning interface, and the refresh mark indicates that the parking location information has not been obtained by the reverse positioning calculation method through dynamic rotation. The refresh mark may cover the entire vehicle positioning interface and set the transparency to 80%.
示例性的,定位指示信息包括指示标识和指示文字,在图10的基础上,如图11所示,电子设备在车辆定位界面还显示指示文字(正在定位准确的停放位置信息)。指示文字可以通过响应于用户操作,调节字体大小、字体颜色、显示方式等显示属性。Exemplarily, the positioning indication information includes an indication mark and indication text. Based on FIG10, as shown in FIG11, the electronic device further displays indication text (locating accurate parking location information) on the vehicle positioning interface. The indication text can adjust display attributes such as font size, font color, and display mode in response to user operations.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在车辆定位界面显示目标车辆的参考位置信息,同时,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息。示例性的,在图11的基础上,如图12所示,电子设备在车辆定位界面还可以,通过虚线方式显示参考位置信息(车位2),以此,区分参考位置信息和停放位置信息。In some embodiments, the electronic device displays the reference position information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface, and at the same time, when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state, the electronic device displays the positioning indication information on the vehicle positioning interface. Exemplarily, based on FIG. 11 , as shown in FIG. 12 , the electronic device can also display the reference position information (parking space 2) in a dotted line manner on the vehicle positioning interface to distinguish the reference position information from the parking position information.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,还可以播放提示音,如,正在为您定位车辆停放位置。In some embodiments, when the electronic device detects that the target vehicle is parked, it can also play a prompt sound, such as locating the parking position of the vehicle for you.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以在车辆定位界面,显示定位指示信息和地图信息,地图信息对应的地域范围包括目标车辆的参考位置信息,再在地图信息上,根据预置标识标记参考位置信息。其中,目标车辆的参考位置信息包括以下任一项:根据目标车辆的第二位置的定位信息和车辆行驶姿态数据得到的推定位置信息,车辆行驶姿态数据包括目标车辆采用预设定位技术无法获得停放位置信息后获取的行驶姿态数据,第二位置为用户离车前采用预设定位技术最后定位的位置;或者,以推定位置信息对应的位置为中心,与预置偏差范围为半径,确定的第一范围位置信息;或者,以第二位置为中心,以第二预置偏差范围为半径,确定的第二范围位置信息。In some embodiments, the electronic device can display positioning indication information and map information on the vehicle positioning interface, and the geographical range corresponding to the map information includes the reference position information of the target vehicle, and then the reference position information is marked on the map information according to the preset identifier. Among them, the reference position information of the target vehicle includes any of the following: estimated position information obtained based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data, the vehicle driving posture data includes the driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain the parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the last position located by the user using the preset positioning technology before leaving the vehicle; or, the first range position information is determined with the position corresponding to the estimated position information as the center and the preset deviation range as the radius; or, the second range position information is determined with the second position as the center and the second preset deviation range as the radius.
需要说明的是,参考位置信息中的第一范围位置信息和第二范围位置信息,可以通过预置标识标记,其中,预置标识方式可以为圆圈标识、矩形标识、三角标识等能够包含一定范围的标识。参考位置信息中的推定位置信息,可以采用与范围位置信息相同的标记方式进行标记,也可以采 用定位图标的标记方式进行标记。It should be noted that the first range position information and the second range position information in the reference position information can be marked by a preset mark, wherein the preset mark can be a circle mark, a rectangle mark, a triangle mark, etc. that can contain a certain range. The estimated position information in the reference position information can be marked in the same way as the range position information, or in a different way. Mark it with the positioning icon.
在本申请中,电子设备可以根据参考位置信息,缩放比例,和当前位置在地图信息中的位置,确定地图信息对应的区域范围。可以理解的是,电子设备可以响应于用户操作(如拖拽、缩放等),改变地图信息对应的区域范围。In the present application, the electronic device can determine the area range corresponding to the map information based on the reference location information, the zoom ratio, and the position of the current location in the map information. It is understandable that the electronic device can change the area range corresponding to the map information in response to user operations (such as dragging, zooming, etc.).
在本申请中,电子设备还可以显示导航规划路线,导航规划路线的始发地为目标车辆对当前的车辆行驶姿态数据的初始位置,导航规划路线的目的地为参考位置信息。相应的,在确定地图信息对应的区域范围过程中,还需要以导航规划路线为依据,以使得在地图信息中能够显示整个导航规划路线。In the present application, the electronic device can also display a navigation planning route, the origin of the navigation planning route is the initial position of the target vehicle with respect to the current vehicle driving posture data, and the destination of the navigation planning route is the reference position information. Accordingly, in the process of determining the area range corresponding to the map information, the navigation planning route is also required as a basis so that the entire navigation planning route can be displayed in the map information.
如此,在车辆定位界面上同时显示定位置指示信息和目标车辆的参考位置信息,以提示用户当前处于未得到目标车辆的车辆停放信息的状态,同时也能够提示用户当前位置为不能准确定位位置。通过在地图信息的基础上,根据预置标识标记参考位置信息,能够标记目标车辆的大概位置,避免由于用户遗忘目标车辆的停放位置,并且无法通过GPS定位目标车辆位置,导致难以找到目标车辆。In this way, the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are simultaneously displayed on the vehicle positioning interface to remind the user that the vehicle parking information of the target vehicle is not obtained, and the user can also be reminded that the current position cannot be accurately positioned. By marking the reference position information according to the preset mark based on the map information, the approximate position of the target vehicle can be marked, avoiding the difficulty in finding the target vehicle due to the user forgetting the parking position of the target vehicle and being unable to locate the target vehicle through GPS.
在本申请实施例中,行走姿态数据是指用户从目标车辆的停放的位置开始,在行走过程中不断生成的姿态数据,从检测到目标车辆处于停放状态开始,直至获得目标位置信息为止。行走姿态数据实际上是指,电子设备在用户行走过程中通过传感器不断检测到的姿态数据的集合。In the embodiment of the present application, the walking posture data refers to the posture data continuously generated by the user during the walking process starting from the parked position of the target vehicle, starting from the detection of the target vehicle being in a parked state until the target position information is obtained. The walking posture data actually refers to the collection of posture data continuously detected by the electronic device through the sensor during the user's walking process.
其中,行走姿态数据可以通过用户行走时携带的电子设备上的传感器来检测。检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器和磁传感器等。基于此,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度和磁信号强度等。The walking posture data can be detected by a sensor on an electronic device carried by the user when walking. The sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
需要说明的是,用户停放车辆时,目标车辆处于停放状态,用户、目标车辆和电子设备仍然处于同于位置,此后,用户通常会下车前往目的地。在用户下车后,目标车辆的停放位置不再变化、用户和电子设备处于同一位置。行走姿态数据,是指在用户行走过程中,电子设备检测到的电子设备本身的姿态变化数据。在一些实施例中,检测行走姿态数据的传感器还可以包括:气压传感器。气压传感器用于检测当前位置的气压数据,通过气压数据能够确定当前位置的水平高度。通过气压数据能够计算得到电子设备的水平高度是否发生变化,以使得行走姿态数据推算得出的推算移动路径,与用户的实际移动路径更相似,进而提高获得的停放位置信息的准确性。It should be noted that when the user parks the vehicle, the target vehicle is in a parked state, and the user, the target vehicle and the electronic device are still in the same position. After that, the user usually gets off the vehicle and goes to the destination. After the user gets off the vehicle, the parking position of the target vehicle no longer changes, and the user and the electronic device are in the same position. Walking posture data refers to the posture change data of the electronic device itself detected by the electronic device during the user's walking process. In some embodiments, the sensor for detecting walking posture data may also include: an air pressure sensor. The air pressure sensor is used to detect the air pressure data of the current position, and the horizontal height of the current position can be determined through the air pressure data. The air pressure data can be used to calculate whether the horizontal height of the electronic device has changed, so that the estimated moving path calculated by the walking posture data is more similar to the actual moving path of the user, thereby improving the accuracy of the obtained parking position information.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在获取用户离车后的行走姿态数据之后,首先根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据,在车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径,接下来,在获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,在车辆定位界面显示第一位置的目标定位信息,第一位置在第一行走路径上。In some embodiments, after the electronic device obtains the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, it first displays the first walking path on the vehicle positioning interface based on the walking posture data after the user leaves the vehicle. Next, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the target positioning information of the first position is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. The first position is on the first walking path.
其中,第一行走路径以参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向用户的行走方向延伸,第一行走路径随着用户离车后的行走姿态数据的增加逐步显示。用户离车后的行走姿态数据可以通过用户行走时携带的电子设备上的传感器来检测。如,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器和磁传感器等。基于此,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度和磁信号强度等。示例性的,在图12的基础上,如图13所示,电子设备在车辆定位界面以虚线方式显示第一行走路径。Among them, the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends to the walking direction of the user, and the first walking path is gradually displayed as the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle increases. The walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle can be detected by a sensor on an electronic device carried by the user when walking. For example, the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions. Exemplarily, based on Figure 12, as shown in Figure 13, the electronic device displays the first walking path in a dotted line manner on the vehicle positioning interface.
如此,在用户离开目标车辆且未获取到停放位置信息的情况下,一旦用户突然发现需要返回目标车辆取东西或者驾驶目标车辆离开,用户可以根据在车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径,进行步行导航,或者直接根据第一行走路径返回至目标车辆位置,提高用户返回目标车辆所需的时间,提高寻找目标车辆的速度。在车辆定位界面显示目标定位信息,能够确定目标定位信息在地图信息中的相对位置,以便于提示用户所处的位置。In this way, when the user leaves the target vehicle and does not obtain the parking location information, once the user suddenly finds that he needs to return to the target vehicle to pick up something or drive the target vehicle away, the user can perform walking navigation according to the first walking path displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, or directly return to the target vehicle location according to the first walking path, thereby reducing the time required for the user to return to the target vehicle and increasing the speed of finding the target vehicle. Displaying the target positioning information on the vehicle positioning interface can determine the relative position of the target positioning information in the map information, so as to prompt the user's location.
S703、电子设备在离车后获取可首次定位的第一位置对应的目标定位信息。S703: After leaving the vehicle, the electronic device obtains target positioning information corresponding to a first position that can be positioned for the first time.
其中,第一位置是指从目标车辆处于停放状态用户离车后行走过程中(从目标车辆处于停放状态电子设备离车后移动过程中),采用预设定位技术不断地对电子设备进行重新定位过程中,能够准确获取电子设备所处位置中的首词定位的位置。其中,预设定位技术包括以下至少一项:卫星定位技术、无线网络通信Wi-Fi技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术。The first position refers to the position of the first word in the position of the electronic device that can be accurately obtained during the process of continuously repositioning the electronic device using the preset positioning technology while the user leaves the target vehicle in a parked state and walks (while the electronic device leaves the target vehicle in a parked state and moves). The preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology, and geomagnetic matching technology.
例如,该目标定位信息,可以为经纬度信息。电子设备能够对电子设备本身所处的位置进行定位,实际上,可以认为用户与电子设备处于同一位置(两者的位置偏差小于预置阈值),即, 目标定位信息为电子设备的目标定位信息,同样也为用户的目标定位信息。For example, the target positioning information may be latitude and longitude information. The electronic device can locate the location of the electronic device itself. In fact, it can be considered that the user and the electronic device are in the same location (the position deviation between the two is less than a preset threshold), that is, The target positioning information is the target positioning information of the electronic device, and is also the target positioning information of the user.
需要说明的是,第一位置是不确定的位置,即使在同一地下车库,由于用户离开目标车辆后的行走姿态数据不同,或者由于采用预设定位技术不同,都可能导致可首次定位的第一位置不同。It should be noted that the first position is an uncertain position. Even in the same underground garage, the first position that can be located for the first time may be different due to different walking posture data of the user after leaving the target vehicle or due to different preset positioning technologies.
其中,预设定位技术包括以下至少一项:卫星定位技术、无线网络通信Wi-Fi技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术。通过上述预设定位技术进行定位的前提是,电子设备具有对应的硬件模块,如,Wi-Fi模块、GNSS定位模块、GMS模块、5G模块、蓝牙模块和磁传感器等。The preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology and geomagnetic matching technology. The premise of positioning through the above preset positioning technology is that the electronic device has the corresponding hardware module, such as Wi-Fi module, GNSS positioning module, GMS module, 5G module, Bluetooth module and magnetic sensor.
如此,如果设置通过任一预设定位技术确定第一位置对应的目标定位信息,都可以获取车辆停放信息,能够提高获取车辆停放信息的速度。同时,如果设置通过至少两项预设定位技术才能够确定第一位置对应的目标定位信息,能够提高获取到的目标定位信息的准确性,进而能够提高获取车辆停放信息的准确性。In this way, if it is set that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is determined by any preset positioning technology, the vehicle parking information can be obtained, which can improve the speed of obtaining the vehicle parking information. At the same time, if it is set that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position can be determined by at least two preset positioning technologies, the accuracy of the obtained target positioning information can be improved, and thus the accuracy of obtaining the vehicle parking information can be improved.
此外,电子设备还可以从云端服务器获取定位参照信息,定位参照信息可以包括单不限于场景地磁数据、楼层识别辅助数据,以及地下车库中的Wi-Fi数据。电子设备根据定位参照信息,以及预设定位技术对应的硬件模块获取的传感数据,能够对电子设备进行定位,获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息。In addition, the electronic device can also obtain positioning reference information from the cloud server. The positioning reference information may include but is not limited to scene geomagnetic data, floor recognition auxiliary data, and Wi-Fi data in the underground garage. The electronic device can locate the electronic device based on the positioning reference information and the sensor data obtained by the hardware module corresponding to the preset positioning technology, and obtain the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
在第一种示例中,针对Wi-Fi技术而言,由于同一个Wi-Fi的无线信号是基于一定点发出的,电子设备当接收到任一Wi-Fi的无线信号时,监测该无线信号的信号强度,通过信号强度的强弱程度,以及信号强度的强弱变化趋势,判断距离该无线信号源的距离,由此,电子设备可以对电子设备进行定位,获取第一位置的目标定位信息。In the first example, for Wi-Fi technology, since the same Wi-Fi wireless signal is emitted based on a certain point, when the electronic device receives any Wi-Fi wireless signal, it monitors the signal strength of the wireless signal, and determines the distance from the wireless signal source by the strength of the signal and the trend of the signal strength. Thus, the electronic device can locate the electronic device and obtain the target positioning information of the first position.
可以理解的是,针对蓝牙通信技术而言,与针对Wi-Fi技术而言的定位方式类似,电子设备当接收到任一蓝牙信号时,检测该蓝牙信号的信号强度,通过信号强度的强弱程度,以及信号强度的强弱变化趋势,判断距离该蓝牙信号源的距离,由此,电子设备可以对电子设备进行定位,获取第一位置的目标定位信息。需要说明的是,由于通过蓝牙方式进行通信的距离较短,因此,通过蓝牙技术得到的目标定位信息更准确。It is understandable that, for Bluetooth communication technology, similar to the positioning method for Wi-Fi technology, when an electronic device receives any Bluetooth signal, it detects the signal strength of the Bluetooth signal, and judges the distance from the Bluetooth signal source by the strength of the signal and the trend of the strength of the signal. Thus, the electronic device can locate the electronic device and obtain the target positioning information of the first position. It should be noted that since the distance of communication via Bluetooth is shorter, the target positioning information obtained through Bluetooth technology is more accurate.
在第二种示例中,GNSS定位技术而言,由于GNSS定位模块能够直接得到经纬度信息,因此,电子设备可以将电子设备的物理硬件包含的GNSS定位模块检测到的经纬度信息确定为目标定位信息。In the second example, for the GNSS positioning technology, since the GNSS positioning module can directly obtain the longitude and latitude information, the electronic device can determine the longitude and latitude information detected by the GNSS positioning module included in the physical hardware of the electronic device as the target positioning information.
在第三种示例中,针对移动通信网络技术而言,为了保障移动通信信号能够在使用尽量少的基站的基础上,实现任一区域的信号全面覆盖,采用蜂窝通信技术。即,每个基站的覆盖区域为固定大小的六边形区域。因此,电子设备在接收到三个及以上基站的移动信号时,获取电子设备与三个及以上基站之间的物理距离,再根据基站的位置坐标得到电子设备的实时位置信息。In the third example, for mobile communication network technology, in order to ensure that mobile communication signals can achieve full signal coverage in any area on the basis of using as few base stations as possible, cellular communication technology is used. That is, the coverage area of each base station is a hexagonal area of a fixed size. Therefore, when an electronic device receives mobile signals from three or more base stations, it obtains the physical distance between the electronic device and the three or more base stations, and then obtains the real-time location information of the electronic device based on the location coordinates of the base stations.
在第四种示例中,针对地磁匹配技术而言,由于地磁场是地球的固有资源,任一位置的地磁强度以及地磁线方向都不相同,通过预先获取的地下车库中地磁序列数据的分布情况,电子设备即可获取当前位置的目标定位信息。In the fourth example, for geomagnetic matching technology, since the geomagnetic field is an inherent resource of the earth, the geomagnetic intensity and direction of the geomagnetic lines at any location are different. By using the distribution of geomagnetic sequence data in the underground garage acquired in advance, the electronic device can obtain the target positioning information of the current location.
在一些实施例中,电子设备还可以根据上述至少两种预设定位技术,获取当前位置的目标定位信息,在得到的至少两个目标定位信息相比的偏差幅度小于预置偏差幅度的情况下,确定其中的任一目标定位信息为最终的目标定位信息。In some embodiments, the electronic device can also obtain target positioning information of the current location based on the above-mentioned at least two preset positioning technologies, and when the deviation amplitude of at least two target positioning information obtained is less than the preset deviation amplitude, determine any one of the target positioning information as the final target positioning information.
在一些实施例中,如图14中的(a)所示,电子设备还可以在车辆定位界面显示目标定位信息,同时显示定位指示信息。如图14中的(b)所示,电子设备可以在车辆定位界面显示目标定位信息,不再显示定位指示信息。In some embodiments, as shown in (a) of FIG14 , the electronic device may also display the target location information on the vehicle location interface, while displaying the location indication information. As shown in (b) of FIG14 , the electronic device may display the target location information on the vehicle location interface, while no longer displaying the location indication information.
在一些实施例中,一般的,由于在用户离开目标车辆之后,经过一段时间之后才能够获取目标定位信息,因此,如果确定用户离车,则经过预设延迟时间之后,获取用户离车后的行走过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息。需要说明的是,确定用户离车后,用户处于行走过程中,电子设备获取离车后的行走姿态数据。In some embodiments, generally, since the target positioning information can only be obtained after a period of time has passed after the user leaves the target vehicle, if it is determined that the user has left the vehicle, the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the user in the walking process after leaving the vehicle is obtained after a preset delay time. It should be noted that after it is determined that the user has left the vehicle, the user is in the walking process, and the electronic device obtains the walking posture data after leaving the vehicle.
其中,预设延迟时间可以是根据经验预先设置的,还可以是响应于用户操作获取的,还可以是通过预置获取方式得到的。上述预置获取方式可以包括:在目标车辆驶入地下车库后,电子设备统计无法采用预设定位技术进行定位的时间长度,再根据该时间长度、行驶姿态数据、以及地 下车库的面积大小,推算电子设备移动到地下车库边缘位置或者无线信号源的预设延迟时间。在不可能获取目标定位信息,或者获取定位信息的可能性较低的情况下,不执行获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息步骤,能够避免浪费系统资源。The preset delay time may be preset based on experience, or may be obtained in response to user operation, or may be obtained through a preset acquisition method. The preset acquisition method may include: after the target vehicle enters the underground garage, the electronic device counts the length of time that the preset positioning technology cannot be used for positioning, and then calculates the time length, driving posture data, and the location of the target vehicle. The size of the underground garage is used to calculate the preset delay time for the electronic device to move to the edge of the underground garage or the wireless signal source. If it is impossible to obtain the target positioning information or the possibility of obtaining the positioning information is low, the step of obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is not performed, which can avoid wasting system resources.
如此,通过设置在确定用户离车后经过预设延迟时间之后,再获取用户离车后的行走过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,能够避免在不可能获取目标定位信息,或者获取定位信息的可能性较低的情况下,执行获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息的无效操作,能够避免浪费电子设备的系统资源。In this way, by setting the setting to obtain the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the user during the walking process after leaving the vehicle after a preset delay time is determined after the user leaves the vehicle, it is possible to avoid performing invalid operations of obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position when it is impossible to obtain the target positioning information or the possibility of obtaining the positioning information is low, and to avoid wasting system resources of the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在获取用户离车后的行走过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据,以及目标定位信息,在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径。其中,第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向用户的行走方向的相反方向延伸。第二行走路径的起点对应的位置信息为车辆停放信息。如此,通过在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径,以使得用户能够直观感知目标车辆的停放位置信息、目标定位信息、以及第二行走路径,有助于用户增强方向意识,提高用户对所处位置的了解程度。In some embodiments, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the user during the walking process after leaving the vehicle, the electronic device displays the second walking path on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle and the target positioning information. The second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction. The position information corresponding to the starting point of the second walking path is the vehicle parking information. In this way, by displaying the second walking path on the vehicle positioning interface, the user can intuitively perceive the parking position information of the target vehicle, the target positioning information, and the second walking path, which helps the user to enhance the sense of direction and improve the user's understanding of the location.
S704、电子设备根据行走姿态数据和目标定位信息,通过反向定位推算方式,获得停放位置信息,并且在车辆定位界面显示停放位置信息。S704: The electronic device obtains parking position information according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information through reverse positioning calculation, and displays the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface.
在本申请实施例中,行走姿态数据是指用户从车辆停放位置行走至第一位置过程中的姿态数据。相应的,反向定位推算方式,是指根据第一位置和行走姿态数据推算车辆停放位置,即,根据目标定位信息和行走姿态数据推算停放位置信息。换而言之,根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息,并且在车辆定位界面显示停放位置信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the walking posture data refers to the posture data of the user when walking from the vehicle parking position to the first position. Correspondingly, the reverse positioning calculation method refers to calculating the vehicle parking position based on the first position and the walking posture data, that is, calculating the parking position information based on the target positioning information and the walking posture data. In other words, the parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained based on the walking posture data after the user leaves the vehicle and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, and the parking position information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
在一些实施例中,在获得停放位置信息之后,电子设备还可以接收用户输入的界面刷新操作,在车辆定位界面显示停放位置信息。通过手动刷新方式,可以强化停放位置信息的校正过程。同时,在车辆定位界面还可以显示目标定位信息,以使得用户从视觉上感受目标定位信息和停放位置信息的空间距离。In some embodiments, after obtaining the parking position information, the electronic device may also receive an interface refresh operation input by the user, and display the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface. By manually refreshing, the correction process of the parking position information may be strengthened. At the same time, the target positioning information may also be displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, so that the user can visually perceive the spatial distance between the target positioning information and the parking position information.
在一些实施例中,用户携带电子设备,电子设备在根据行走姿态数据和目标定位信息,进行反向定位推算的过程中,还可以获取第二行走路径。与第一行走路径相比,第二行走路径是用户实际的行走路径。在图13的基础上,对车辆定位界面如何显示第一行走路径和第二行走路径进行说明。In some embodiments, the user carries an electronic device, and the electronic device can also obtain a second walking path during reverse positioning calculation based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information. Compared with the first walking path, the second walking path is the actual walking path of the user. Based on FIG. 13, how the vehicle positioning interface displays the first walking path and the second walking path is described.
在第一种示例中,如图15中的(a)所示,电子设备在车辆定位界面以虚线方式显示第一行走路径,同时以实线方式显示第二行走路径。In the first example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 15 , the electronic device displays the first walking path in a dotted line manner on the vehicle positioning interface, and displays the second walking path in a solid line manner.
在第二种示例中,车辆定位界面是动态变化的,首先,如图15中的(a)所示,在车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径和第二行走路径,然后,经过预置时间(如10秒)之后,如图15中的(b)所示,电子设备在车辆定位界面不再显示第一行走路径,电子设备在车辆定位界面只以实线方式显示第二行走路径。In the second example, the vehicle positioning interface changes dynamically. First, as shown in (a) in FIG. 15 , the first walking path and the second walking path are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface. Then, after a preset time (such as 10 seconds), as shown in (b) in FIG. 15 , the electronic device no longer displays the first walking path on the vehicle positioning interface, and the electronic device only displays the second walking path in a solid line on the vehicle positioning interface.
在第三种示例中,如图15中的(b)所示,电子设备在车辆定位界面只以实线方式显示第二行走路径。In the third example, as shown in (b) of FIG. 15 , the electronic device displays the second walking path only as a solid line on the vehicle positioning interface.
在一些实施例中,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,电子设备可以根据目标车辆的第二位置的定位信息和车辆行驶姿态数据,得到的推定位置信息。其中,车辆行驶姿态数据包括目标车辆采用预设定位技术无法获得停放位置信息后获取的行驶姿态数据,第二位置为用户离车前采用预设定位技术最后定位的位置。其后,电子设备通过上述步骤S702-S704获得停放位置信息。最后,电子设备对推定位置信息和停放位置信息的属性(如,定位时长、置信度、精度等)进行比较,在车辆定位界面显示置信度较高的位置信息(推定位置信息或停放位置信息)。如此,进一步提高车辆定位几面显示的目标车辆的停放位置信息的准确性。In some embodiments, when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, the electronic device can obtain the estimated position information based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data. Among them, the vehicle driving posture data includes the driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain the parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the position last located by the preset positioning technology before the user leaves the vehicle. Thereafter, the electronic device obtains the parking position information through the above steps S702-S704. Finally, the electronic device compares the attributes of the estimated position information and the parking position information (such as positioning duration, confidence, accuracy, etc.), and displays the position information with higher confidence (estimated position information or parking position information) on the vehicle positioning interface. In this way, the accuracy of the parking position information of the target vehicle displayed on the vehicle positioning interface is further improved.
在一些实施例中,电子设备获得停放位置信息之后,可以保存停放位置信息,以便于后续响应于用户操作,根据停放位置信息寻找目标车辆。In some embodiments, after the electronic device obtains the parking location information, it can save the parking location information so as to find the target vehicle according to the parking location information in response to user operations later.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备在生成和使用过程中,由于传感器的安装位置偏差或者使用习惯偏差,可能导致获取的传感数据与实际的传感数据有一定的偏差,可能由于行走姿态数据不准 确,造成获得的停放位置信息不足够准确。为了进一步提高获得的停放位置信息的精确度,还可以通过下述两种方式进行优化:In the embodiment of the present application, during the generation and use of the electronic device, due to the deviation of the installation position of the sensor or the deviation of the usage habits, the acquired sensor data may have a certain deviation from the actual sensor data. In order to further improve the accuracy of the obtained parking position information, it can also be optimized in the following two ways:
第一种优化方式,在执行上述步骤S704之后,本申请实施例提供的车辆定位方法还包括:电子设备还可以先获取用户离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据。然后,获取第三位置对应的校正定位信息,其中,第三位置为用户离开第一位置后经过预置距离到达定位的位置。再者,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正用户离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数。接下来,根据校正补偿参数,校正并更新用户离车后的行走姿态数据。再接下来,根据更新后的用户离车后的行走姿态数据,以及目标定位信息,获取更新后的停放位置信息。最后,在车辆定位界面,显示更新后的停放位置信息。The first optimization method is that after executing the above step S704, the vehicle positioning method provided by the embodiment of the present application also includes: the electronic device can also first obtain the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position. Then, the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position is obtained, wherein the third position is the position where the user reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position after a preset distance. Furthermore, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position is corrected, and the correction compensation parameters are obtained. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle is corrected and updated. Next, according to the updated walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the target positioning information, the updated parking position information is obtained. Finally, the updated parking position information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
第二种优化方式,上述步骤S704可以替换成如下步骤:首先,根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息。然后,获取用户离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据。再者,获取第三位置对应的校正定位信息,第三位置为用户离开第一位置后经过预置距离到达定位的位置。接下来,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正用户离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数。再接下来,根据校正补偿参数,校正并更新用户离车后的行走姿态数据。最后,根据更新后的用户离车后的行走姿态数据,以及目标定位信息,获得停放位置信息。In the second optimization method, the above step S704 can be replaced by the following steps: First, based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position. Then, obtain the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position. Furthermore, obtain the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position, and the third position is the position where the user reaches the positioning position after leaving the first position after a preset distance. Next, with the target positioning information as the starting position and the correction positioning information as the ending position, correct the walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position, and obtain the correction compensation parameters. Next, according to the correction compensation parameters, correct and update the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle. Finally, according to the updated walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the target positioning information, obtain the parking position information.
由于第一位置对应的目标定位信息,以及第三位置对应的校正定位信息是准确的,因此,以目标定位信息为起始位置,以校正定位信息为终止位置,校正用户离开第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数,能够对用户离车后的行走姿态数据(直至用户抵达第一位置为止)进行校正,进而提高获取的停放位置信息的精确度。Since the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the correction positioning information corresponding to the third position are accurate, the target positioning information is used as the starting position and the correction positioning information is used as the ending position. The walking posture data of the user after leaving the first position is corrected to obtain the correction compensation parameters. The walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle (until the user arrives at the first position) can be corrected, thereby improving the accuracy of the obtained parking position information.
在本申请实施例中,在上述步骤S704之后,电子设备还可以响应于用户的车辆寻找请求,以停放位置信息为目标位置,以当前实时定位位置为起始位置,生成导航路径。可以理解的是,当前实时定位位置是电子设备通过预设定位技术进行定位得到的。如此,在能够通过预设定位技术进行定位的情况下,生成导航路径,以使得在无法通过预设定位技术进行定位的情况下,也能够进行导航,提高寻找目标车辆的效率。In an embodiment of the present application, after the above step S704, the electronic device can also generate a navigation path in response to the user's vehicle search request, using the parking location information as the target location and the current real-time positioning location as the starting location. It can be understood that the current real-time positioning location is obtained by the electronic device through positioning by a preset positioning technology. In this way, when positioning can be performed by the preset positioning technology, a navigation path is generated, so that navigation can also be performed when positioning cannot be performed by the preset positioning technology, thereby improving the efficiency of finding the target vehicle.
本申请实施例的车辆定位方法,在目标车辆处于停放状态,并且通过卫星定位技术等常规的预设定位方技术无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,将用户离车后的行走姿态数据作为行进相关数据,将目标定位信息(即,用户在行走过程中采用预设定位技术可首次定位的位置对应的位置信息)作为目的位置,推算初始位置(即用户离车的位置,也就是目标车辆的停放位置),即,通过反向定位推算方式获得停放位置信息。以此,能够在无法通过预设定位技术定位目标车辆的停放位置的情况下,获得目标车辆的停放位置,而且通过确保第一位置对应的目标定位信息是准确的,以及用户离车后的行走姿态数据是准确的,能够提高获得停放位置信息的准确性。The vehicle positioning method of the embodiment of the present application, when the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained through conventional preset positioning techniques such as satellite positioning technology, uses the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle as the travel-related data, and uses the target positioning information (i.e., the position information corresponding to the position that the user can first locate using the preset positioning technology during walking) as the destination position, and calculates the initial position (i.e., the position where the user leaves the vehicle, that is, the parking position of the target vehicle), that is, the parking position information is obtained by reverse positioning and calculation. In this way, the parking position of the target vehicle can be obtained when the parking position of the target vehicle cannot be located by the preset positioning technology, and by ensuring that the target positioning information corresponding to the first position is accurate, and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle is accurate, the accuracy of the parking position information can be improved.
本申请实施例提供的车辆定位方法,可以电子设备可以安装的独立的应用程序,还可为电子设备可以安装的地图导航应用程序的模块。在应用车辆定位方法的过程中,电子设备都需要具有获取行走姿态数据、目标定位信息和停放位置信息的权限。The vehicle positioning method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be an independent application that can be installed in an electronic device, or a module of a map navigation application that can be installed in an electronic device. In the process of applying the vehicle positioning method, the electronic device needs to have the authority to obtain walking posture data, target positioning information and parking position information.
在本申请实施例中,值得说明的是,如果电子设备没有接收到用户输入的界面触发操作,则可以采用用户无感的定位方式。也就是,在前端或后台显示车辆定位界面,并且在上述S702-S704中,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备获得停放位置信息,可以采用以下方式实现。In the embodiment of the present application, it is worth noting that if the electronic device does not receive the interface triggering operation input by the user, a user-insensitive positioning method can be used. That is, the vehicle positioning interface is displayed on the front end or the back end, and in the above S702-S704, when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state, the electronic device obtains the parking position information, which can be implemented in the following manner.
在第一种示例中,如图16所示,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备获得停放位置信息,包括S1601-S1604。In the first example, as shown in FIG. 16 , when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains parking position information, including S1601 - S1604 .
S1601、电子设备判断用户是否离开目标车辆。S1601. The electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
其中,电子设备可以通过检测用户与目标车辆之间的距离,在该距离大于预置距离的情况下,开始获取行走姿态数据。示例性的,预置距离可以为1米。The electronic device may detect the distance between the user and the target vehicle, and when the distance is greater than a preset distance, start acquiring the walking posture data. For example, the preset distance may be 1 meter.
在一些实施例中,如果电子设备判断用户还没有离开目标车辆,那么电子设备继续判断用户是否离开目标车辆。可以理解的是,在目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,才开始判断用户是否离开目标车辆。 In some embodiments, if the electronic device determines that the user has not left the target vehicle, the electronic device continues to determine whether the user has left the target vehicle. It is understandable that when the target vehicle is in a parked state, it is determined whether the user has left the target vehicle.
需要说明的是,电子设备可以不判断是否离开目标车辆,直接获取行走姿态数据。It should be noted that the electronic device may directly obtain the walking posture data without determining whether the target vehicle has been left.
S1602、如果判断结果为是,则电子设备获取行走姿态数据,并通过正向PDR推算方式,获取行走姿态数据对应的第一行走路径。S1602: If the judgment result is yes, the electronic device obtains the walking posture data, and obtains the first walking path corresponding to the walking posture data by forward PDR calculation.
在一些实施例中,行走姿态数据对应的行走路径是指从用户离开目标车辆,即,用户下车开始,直至走到可通过上述预设定位技术定位的第一位置为止。其中,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器和磁传感器。基于此,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度和磁信号强度等数据。In some embodiments, the walking path corresponding to the walking posture data refers to the walking path from the time when the user leaves the target vehicle, that is, the user gets off the vehicle, until the user walks to the first position that can be located by the above-mentioned preset positioning technology. Among them, the sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes data such as angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
其中,正向PDR推算方式包括步频检测、步长估计、航向估计等,通过递推的方式,推算用户的第一行走路径。Among them, the forward PDR calculation method includes cadence detection, step length estimation, heading estimation, etc., and the user's first walking path is calculated by recursion.
可以理解的是,虽然电子设备获取行走姿态数据对应的第一行走路径,采用正向PDR推算方式,但是,从整体上看,电子设备仍然根据反向定位推算通过第一位置反向获得停放位置信息。It is understandable that although the electronic device obtains the first walking path corresponding to the walking posture data and adopts the forward PDR calculation method, overall, the electronic device still obtains the parking position information through the first position in reverse based on the reverse positioning calculation.
S1603、电子设备获取第一位置的目标定位信息。S1603: The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
可以理解的是,电子设备检测到未能通过上述预设定位技术获取到定位信息的情况下即未获得第一位置的情况下,继续执行上述步骤S1602获取行走姿态数据。It is understandable that when the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above-mentioned preset positioning technology, that is, when the first position is not obtained, it continues to execute the above-mentioned step S1602 to obtain the walking posture data.
在一些实施例中,当用户不断行进走时,只要开始执行上述步骤后1602即始终推算正向定位推算移动路径,直至通过Wi-Fi技术、蓝牙通信技术、GNSS定位技术、移动通信网络技术和地磁匹配技术等技术手段及其组合方式获取到定位信息,则确定当前位置为可首次定位的第一位置,该定位信息为第一位置对应的目标定位信息。In some embodiments, when the user keeps walking, as long as the above steps are executed, 1602 will always calculate the forward positioning and moving path until the positioning information is obtained through technical means such as Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology and their combination methods, then the current position is determined to be the first position that can be located for the first time, and the positioning information is the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
需要说明的是,第一位置是指电子设备的首个定位点的绝对位置。It should be noted that the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
S1604、电子设备根据第一行走路径和目标定位信息,进行换算获得停放位置信息。S1604: The electronic device converts the first walking path and the target positioning information to obtain parking position information.
在一些实施例中,在用户离车后的行走过程中,根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据确定用户离车之后的行走过程轨迹。在此基础上,将第一位置作为行走过程轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置信息。In some embodiments, during the walking process after the user leaves the vehicle, the walking trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle is determined according to the walking posture data after the user leaves the vehicle. On this basis, the first position is used as the end position of the walking trajectory, and the starting position of the walking trajectory is determined, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
可以理解的是,第一行走路径是通过行走过程轨迹表示的设备参数得到的,第一行走路径以参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向用户的行走方向延伸,用户行走参数包括行走方向和行走速度。It can be understood that the first walking path is obtained by the device parameters represented by the walking process trajectory. The first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends in the walking direction of the user. The user walking parameters include the walking direction and the walking speed.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据确定用户离车后的行走过程轨迹,并以第一位置作为行走轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,即目标车辆的停放位置信息,以使得在无法通过预设定位技术无法对目标车辆进行定位的情况下仍然能够获取目标车辆的停放位置信息。同时,利用行走姿态数据确定行走过程轨迹,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题。In this way, the walking process trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle can be determined based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle without using the preset positioning technology, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined with the first position as the end position of the walking trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be located by the preset positioning technology. At the same time, using the walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and even cannot be used as a reference position for parking.
在第二种示例中,如图17所示,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备获得停放位置信息,包括S1701-S1704。In the second example, as shown in FIG. 17 , when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains parking position information, including S1701 - S1704 .
S1701、电子设备判断用户是否离开目标车辆。S1701. The electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
本步骤与图16所示的S1601类似,在此不再赘述。This step is similar to S1601 shown in FIG16 , and will not be described again here.
S1702、如果判断结果为是,则电子设备获取行走姿态数据。S1702: If the judgment result is yes, the electronic device obtains walking posture data.
在一些实施例中,行走姿态数据对应的行走路径是指从用户离开目标车辆,即,用户下车开始,直至走到第一位置为止。其中,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器和磁传感器。基于此,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度和磁信号强度。In some embodiments, the walking path corresponding to the walking posture data refers to the walking path from when the user leaves the target vehicle, that is, when the user gets off the vehicle, until the user walks to the first position. The sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions.
需要说明的是,获取行走姿态数据之后,电子设备还可以缓存行走姿态数据。It should be noted that after acquiring the walking posture data, the electronic device may also cache the walking posture data.
S1703、电子设备获取第一位置的目标定位信息。S1703: The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
可以理解的是,电子设备检测到未能通过上述预设定位技术获取到定位信息的情况下,即未获得第一位置的情况下,继续执行上述步骤S1702获取行走姿态数据。第一位置是指电子设备的首个定位点的绝对位置。It is understandable that when the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above preset positioning technology, that is, when the first position is not obtained, the above step S1702 is continued to obtain the walking posture data. The first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,在步骤S1703之后,电子设备还可以对行走姿态数据进行校正。具体包括: 电子设备还可以获取用户从第一位置行走至第二位置对应的第一姿态数据;根据第一位置的定位信息和第二位置的定位信息,判断从第一位置,以第一姿态数据行走,是否能到达第二位置;如果判断结果为否,则对第一姿态数据进行校正,获取数据补偿参数;根据数据补偿参数,校正并更新行走姿态数据。电子设备在生成和使用过程中,由于传感器的安装位置偏差或者使用习惯偏差,可能导致获取的传感数据与实际的传感数据有一定的偏差,因此,根据第一位置和第二位置的定位是准确的,这一前提条件,计算得到数据补偿参数,进而对行走姿态数据进行校正,以提高通过行走姿态数据获取停放位置信息的定位精度。In some embodiments, after step S1703, the electronic device may also correct the walking posture data. Specifically, the correction includes: The electronic device can also obtain the first posture data corresponding to the user walking from the first position to the second position; determine whether the second position can be reached by walking from the first position with the first posture data according to the positioning information of the first position and the positioning information of the second position; if the judgment result is no, correct the first posture data and obtain the data compensation parameters; correct and update the walking posture data according to the data compensation parameters. During the generation and use of the electronic device, due to the deviation of the installation position of the sensor or the deviation of the usage habits, the acquired sensor data may have a certain deviation from the actual sensor data. Therefore, based on the premise that the positioning of the first position and the second position is accurate, the data compensation parameters are calculated, and then the walking posture data is corrected to improve the positioning accuracy of the parking position information obtained through the walking posture data.
S1704、电子设备根据行走姿态数据和目标定位信息,通过反向定位推算方式获得停放位置信息。S1704: The electronic device obtains parking position information through reverse positioning calculation based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information.
其中,在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径的情况下,第二行走路径包括轨迹位置,第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向用户的行走方向的相反方向延伸。如此,依据用户离车后的行走姿态数据获取包括轨迹位置的第二行走路径,并且第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向用户的行走方向的相反方向延伸,也就是第二行走路径的轨迹位置包括车辆停放信息,以此,能够确保目标定位信息对应的位置和车辆停放信息对应的位置属于轨迹位置,进而确保获取的车辆停放信息的准确性。In the case where the vehicle positioning interface displays the second walking path, the second walking path includes a track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction. In this way, the second walking path including the track position is obtained based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction, that is, the track position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information, so that it can be ensured that the position corresponding to the target positioning information and the position corresponding to the vehicle parking information belong to the track position, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the acquired vehicle parking information.
在一些实施例中,在获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息和用户离车后的行走姿态数据,确定用户行走至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定用户行走的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置。In some embodiments, after obtaining the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position is determined based on the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息和用户离车后的行走姿态数据,确定用户行走至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定用户行走的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题,即,提高停放位置信息的准确性。In this way, without using the preset positioning technology, the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position can be determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined. The starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle. This can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by VDR inference is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and it can even be used as a reference position for parking, that is, the accuracy of the parking position information is improved.
在第三种示例中,如图18所示,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备获得停放位置信息,包括S1801-S1804。In the third example, as shown in FIG. 18 , when it is detected that the target vehicle is parked, the electronic device obtains parking location information, including S1801 - S1804 .
S1801、电子设备判断用户是否离开目标车辆。S1801. The electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
本步骤与图16所示的S1601类似,在此不再赘述。This step is similar to S1601 shown in FIG16 , and will not be described again here.
S1802、如果判断结果为是,则电子设备获取行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据,并通过正向PDR推算方式和地磁匹配方式,获取行走姿态数据对应的第一行走路径。S1802: If the judgment result is yes, the electronic device obtains walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data, and obtains a first walking path corresponding to the walking posture data through a forward PDR calculation method and a geomagnetic matching method.
在一些实施例中,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度和磁信号强度等数据,还包括地磁序列数据,用于检测地磁序列数据的传感器可以为磁传感器。In some embodiments, the walking posture data includes data such as angular velocity, acceleration, and magnetic signal strength in multiple directions, and also includes geomagnetic sequence data. The sensor used to detect the geomagnetic sequence data may be a magnetic sensor.
其中,正向PDR推算方式包括步频检测、步长估计、航向估计等,通过递推的方式,推算用户的第一行走路径。Among them, the forward PDR calculation method includes cadence detection, step length estimation, heading estimation, etc., and the user's first walking path is calculated by recursion.
在一些实施例中,将地磁序列数据与场景地磁数据进行匹配,根据匹配程度对第一行走路径进行调整,以此,提高第一行走路径的准确度。In some embodiments, the geomagnetic sequence data is matched with the scene geomagnetic data, and the first walking path is adjusted according to the degree of matching, thereby improving the accuracy of the first walking path.
在另一些实施例中,正向PDR推算方式过程中,还可以通过Wi-Fi技术、蓝牙通信技术、GNSS定位技术、移动通信网络技术和地磁匹配技术得到的路径相关信息,并将路径相关信息作为辅助信息,对第一行走路径进行校正,以提高正向PDR推算方式的准确度。In other embodiments, during the forward PDR calculation method, path-related information can be obtained through Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology, and the path-related information can be used as auxiliary information to correct the first walking path to improve the accuracy of the forward PDR calculation method.
在车辆定位过程中,如果目标车辆的停放位置,与第一位置处于不同的楼层,那么仅通过行走姿态数据补足以获取停放位置信息。因此,行走姿态数据中还可以包括能够判断楼层的地磁数据,以提高停放位置信息的准确性。In the vehicle positioning process, if the parking position of the target vehicle is on a different floor from the first position, the parking position information is obtained only by supplementing the walking posture data. Therefore, the walking posture data may also include geomagnetic data that can determine the floor to improve the accuracy of the parking position information.
S1803、电子设备获取第一位置的目标定位信息。S1803: The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
可以理解的是,电子设备检测到未能通过上述预设定位技术获取到定位信息的情况下即未获得第一位置的情况下,继续执行上述步骤S1802获取行走姿态数据。It is understandable that when the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above-mentioned preset positioning technology, that is, when the first position is not obtained, it continues to execute the above-mentioned step S1802 to obtain the walking posture data.
在一些实施例中,当用户不断行走时,只要开始执行上述步骤S1802即始终推算第一行走路径,直至获得第一位置时,通过Wi-Fi技术、蓝牙通信技术、GNSS定位技术、移动通信网络技术和地磁匹配技术等技术手段及其组合方式,获取目标定位信息。 In some embodiments, when the user continues walking, as long as the above step S1802 is executed, the first walking path is always calculated until the first position is obtained, and the target positioning information is obtained through technical means such as Wi-Fi technology, Bluetooth communication technology, GNSS positioning technology, mobile communication network technology and geomagnetic matching technology and their combinations.
需要说明的是,第一位置是指电子设备的首个定位点的绝对位置。It should be noted that the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
S1804、电子设备根据第一行走路径和目标定位信息,进行换算获得停放位置信息。S1804: The electronic device converts the first walking path and the target positioning information to obtain parking position information.
在一些实施例中,在用户离车后的行走过程中,根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据确定用户离车之后的行走过程轨迹。在此基础上,将第一位置作为行走过程轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置信息。In some embodiments, during the walking process after the user leaves the vehicle, the walking trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle is determined based on the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data after the user leaves the vehicle. On this basis, the first position is used as the end position of the walking trajectory, and the starting position of the walking trajectory is determined, and the starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
可以理解的是,第一行走路径是通过行走过程轨迹表示的设备参数得到的,第一行走路径以参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向用户的行走方向延伸,用户行走参数包括行走方向和行走速度。It can be understood that the first walking path is obtained by the device parameters represented by the walking process trajectory. The first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends in the walking direction of the user. The user walking parameters include the walking direction and the walking speed.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据用户离车后的行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据,确定用户离车后的行走过程轨迹,并以第一位置作为行走轨迹的终点位置,确定行走过程轨迹的起点位置,即目标车辆的停放位置信息,以使得在无法通过预设定位技术无法对目标车辆进行定位的情况下仍然能够获取目标车辆的停放位置信息。同时,利用行走姿态数据确定行走过程轨迹,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题。同时,由于地磁序列数据与目标车辆所处的环境关联性较强,因此,能够提高加入地磁序列数据确定的行走过程轨迹的准确性,还能够提高采用地磁匹配技术获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息的准确性。In this way, the walking process trajectory of the user after leaving the vehicle can be determined according to the walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data of the user after leaving the vehicle without using the preset positioning technology, and the first position is used as the end position of the walking trajectory to determine the starting position of the walking process trajectory, that is, the parking position information of the target vehicle, so that the parking position information of the target vehicle can still be obtained when the target vehicle cannot be positioned by the preset positioning technology. At the same time, using the walking posture data to determine the walking process trajectory can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by the VDR inference method is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and even cannot be used as a reference position for parking. At the same time, since the geomagnetic sequence data is highly correlated with the environment in which the target vehicle is located, the accuracy of the walking process trajectory determined by adding the geomagnetic sequence data can be improved, and the accuracy of the target positioning information corresponding to the first position obtained by using the geomagnetic matching technology can also be improved.
在第四种示例中,如图19所示,在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态的情况下,电子设备获得停放位置信息,包括S1901-S1904。In the fourth example, as shown in FIG. 19 , when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state, the electronic device obtains parking position information, including S1901 - S1904 .
S1901、电子设备判断用户是否离开目标车辆。S1901. The electronic device determines whether the user leaves the target vehicle.
本步骤与图16所示的S1601类似,在此不再赘述。This step is similar to S1601 shown in FIG16 , and will not be described again here.
S1902、如果判断结果为是,则电子设备获取行走姿态数据和地磁序列数据。S1902: If the judgment result is yes, the electronic device obtains walking posture data and geomagnetic sequence data.
在一些实施例中,行走姿态数据对应的行走路径是指从用户离开目标车辆,即,用户下车开始,直至走到第一位置为止。其中,检测行走姿态数据的传感器包括以下至少一种:陀螺仪传感器、加速度传感器和磁传感器。基于此,行走姿态数据包括多方向的角速度、加速度、磁信号强度和地磁序列数据,地磁序列数据用于检测地磁序列数据的传感器可以为磁传感器。In some embodiments, the walking path corresponding to the walking posture data refers to the walking path from the time when the user leaves the target vehicle, that is, the user gets off the vehicle, until the user walks to the first position. The sensor for detecting the walking posture data includes at least one of the following: a gyroscope sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a magnetic sensor. Based on this, the walking posture data includes multi-directional angular velocity, acceleration, magnetic signal strength, and geomagnetic sequence data, and the sensor used to detect the geomagnetic sequence data can be a magnetic sensor.
需要说明的是,获取行走姿态数据之后,电子设备还可以缓存行走姿态数据。It should be noted that after acquiring the walking posture data, the electronic device may also cache the walking posture data.
S1903、电子设备获取第一位置的目标定位信息。S1903: The electronic device obtains target positioning information of the first position.
可以理解的是,电子设备检测到未能通过上述预设定位技术获取到定位信息的情况下即未获得第一位置的情况下,继续执行上述步骤S1902获取行走姿态数据。需要说明的是,第一位置是指电子设备的首个定位点的绝对位置。It is understandable that when the electronic device detects that the positioning information cannot be obtained through the above preset positioning technology, that is, the first position is not obtained, the above step S1902 is continued to obtain the walking posture data. It should be noted that the first position refers to the absolute position of the first positioning point of the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,在步骤1903之后,电子设备还可以对行走姿态数据进行校正。具体包括:电子设备还可以获取用户从第一位置行走至第二位置对应的第一姿态数据;判断从第一位置,以第一姿态数据行走,是否能到达第二位置;如果判断结果为否,则对第一姿态数据进行校正,获取数据补偿参数;根据数据补偿参数,校正并更新行走姿态数据。电子设备在生成和使用过程中,由于传感器的安装位置偏差或者使用习惯偏差,可能导致获取的传感数据与实际的传感数据有一定的偏差,因此,根据第一位置和第二位置的定位是准确的,这一前提条件,计算得到数据补偿参数,进而对行走姿态数据进行校正,以提高通过行走姿态数据获取停放位置信息的定位精度。In some embodiments, after step 1903, the electronic device can also correct the walking posture data. Specifically, it includes: the electronic device can also obtain the first posture data corresponding to the user walking from the first position to the second position; determine whether the second position can be reached from the first position by walking with the first posture data; if the judgment result is no, correct the first posture data and obtain the data compensation parameters; according to the data compensation parameters, correct and update the walking posture data. During the generation and use of the electronic device, due to the deviation of the installation position of the sensor or the deviation of the usage habits, the acquired sensor data may have a certain deviation from the actual sensor data. Therefore, based on the premise that the positioning of the first position and the second position is accurate, the data compensation parameters are calculated, and then the walking posture data is corrected to improve the positioning accuracy of the parking position information obtained through the walking posture data.
S1904、电子设备根据行走姿态数据和目标定位信息,通过反向定位推算方式和地磁匹配方式得到停放位置信息。S1904: The electronic device obtains parking position information based on the walking posture data and the target positioning information through reverse positioning calculation and geomagnetic matching.
其中,在车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径的情况下,第二行走路径包括轨迹位置,第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向用户的行走方向的相反方向延伸。如此,依据用户离车后的行走姿态数据获取包括轨迹位置的第二行走路径,并且第二行走路径以目标定位信息为终点并向用户的行走方向的相反方向延伸,也就是第二行走路径的轨迹位置包括车辆停放信息,以此,能够确保目标定位信息对应的位置和车辆停放信息对应的位置属于轨迹位置,进而确保获取的车辆停放信息的准确性。In the case where the vehicle positioning interface displays the second walking path, the second walking path includes a track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction. In this way, the second walking path including the track position is obtained based on the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the user's walking direction, that is, the track position of the second walking path includes the vehicle parking information, so that it can be ensured that the position corresponding to the target positioning information and the position corresponding to the vehicle parking information belong to the track position, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the acquired vehicle parking information.
在一些实施例中,根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息、用户离车后的行走姿态数据和用户离车后的地磁序列数据,确定用户行走至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定用户行走的起点位置, 起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置。In some embodiments, the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position is determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the geomagnetic sequence data of the user after leaving the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined. The starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
如此,无需通过预设定位技术,即可根据第一位置对应的目标定位信息、用户离车后的行走姿态数据和用户离车后的地磁序列数据,确定用户行走至第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定用户行走的起点位置,起点位置即为目标车辆的停放位置,能够避免由于电子设备的IMU性能约束导致的通过VDR推断方式得到的停放位置信息精度明显下降,甚至无法作为停车的参考位置的问题。In this way, without using the preset positioning technology, the trajectory position of the user before walking to the first position can be determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle, and the geomagnetic sequence data after the user leaves the vehicle, until the starting position of the user's walking is determined. The starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle. This can avoid the problem that the accuracy of the parking position information obtained by VDR inference is significantly reduced due to the IMU performance constraints of the electronic device, and it may even be unable to be used as a reference position for parking.
本申请实施例中还提供了一种车辆定位装置,参见图20,该车辆定位装置包括第一处理单元2002、第二处理单元2003和第三处理单元2004。A vehicle positioning device is also provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 20 , the vehicle positioning device includes a first processing unit 2002 , a second processing unit 2003 and a third processing unit 2004 .
其中,第一处理单元2002,用于在检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取电子设备的行走姿态数据。例如执行前述实施例中的步骤S702。The first processing unit 2002 is used to obtain the walking posture data of the electronic device when it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained. For example, step S702 in the above embodiment is executed.
第二处理单元2003,用于获取电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,第一位置为电子设备在移动过程中采用预设定位技术可首次定位的位置。例如执行前述实施例中的步骤S703。The second processing unit 2003 is used to obtain target positioning information corresponding to a first position of the electronic device during movement, where the first position is a position that can be first positioned by the electronic device using a preset positioning technology during movement. For example, step S703 in the above embodiment is executed.
第三处理单元2004,用于根据行走姿态数据和第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得目标车辆的停放位置信息,并且在车辆定位界面显示停放位置信息。例如执行前述实施例中的步骤S704。The third processing unit 2004 is used to obtain the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, and display the parking position information on the vehicle positioning interface. For example, step S704 in the above embodiment is executed.
可以理解的是,为了实现上述功能,电子设备包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件和/或软件模块。结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员可以结合实施例对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It is understandable that in order to implement the above functions, the electronic device includes hardware and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. In combination with the algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application in combination with the embodiments, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
本实施例可以根据上述方法示例对电子设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块可以采用硬件的形式实现。需要说明的是,本实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment, the electronic device can be divided into functional modules according to the above method example. For example, each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
本申请实施例还提供一种电子设备,如图21所示,该电子设备可以包括一个或者多个处理器1001、存储器1002和通信接口1003。An embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device, as shown in FIG. 21 , which may include one or more processors 1001 , a memory 1002 and a communication interface 1003 .
其中,存储器1002、通信接口1003与处理器1001耦合。例如,存储器1002、通信接口1003与处理器1001可以通过总线1004耦合在一起。The memory 1002 and the communication interface 1003 are coupled to the processor 1001. For example, the memory 1002, the communication interface 1003 and the processor 1001 may be coupled together via a bus 1004.
其中,通信接口1003用于与其他设备进行数据传输。存储器1002中存储有计算机程序代码。计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当计算机指令被处理器1001执行时,使得电子设备执行本申请实施例中的车辆定位方法。The communication interface 1003 is used for data transmission with other devices. The memory 1002 stores computer program code. The computer program code includes computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed by the processor 1001, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,处理器1001可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP),专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。Among them, the processor 1001 can be a processor or a controller, for example, it can be a central processing unit (CPU), a general processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic blocks, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the contents of this disclosure. The processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of DSP and microprocessors, and the like.
其中,总线1004可以是外设部件互连标准(Peripheral Component Interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(Extended Industry Standard Architecture,EISA)总线等。上述总线1004可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图21中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The bus 1004 may be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus. The bus 1004 may be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, etc. For ease of representation, FIG21 only uses one thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序代码,当上述处理器执行该计算机程序代码时,电子设备执行上述方法实施例中的相关方法步骤。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program code is stored. When the processor executes the computer program code, the electronic device executes the relevant method steps in the method embodiment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述方法实施例中的相关方法步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a computer, it enables the computer to execute the relevant method steps in the above method embodiment.
其中,本申请提供的电子设备、计算机存储介质或者计算机程序产品均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此 处不再赘述。Among them, the electronic device, computer storage medium or computer program product provided in this application is used to execute the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method provided above. I will not go into details here.
通过以上实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above implementation methods, technical personnel in the relevant field can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, only the division of the above-mentioned functional modules is used as an example. In actual applications, the above-mentioned functions can be assigned to different functional modules as needed, that is, the internal structure of the device can be divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed in multiple different places. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the present embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that makes the contribution or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions to enable a device (which can be a single-chip microcomputer, chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code.
以上内容,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above contents are only specific implementation methods of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application shall be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (23)

  1. 一种车辆定位方法,应用于电子设备,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A vehicle positioning method, applied to electronic equipment, is characterized in that the method comprises:
    在检测到所述目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取所述电子设备的行走姿态数据;When it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, acquiring walking posture data of the electronic device;
    获取所述电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,所述第一位置为所述电子设备在移动过程中采用预设定位技术可首次定位的位置;Acquire target positioning information corresponding to a first position of the electronic device during movement, where the first position is a position where the electronic device can be first positioned using a preset positioning technology during movement;
    根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息。The parking position information of the target vehicle is obtained according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    响应于用户的触发操作,在车辆定位界面显示所述目标车辆的位置信息。In response to a trigger operation by the user, the location information of the target vehicle is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, characterized in that after obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle, the method further comprises:
    在所述车辆定位界面,显示停放位置信息。On the vehicle positioning interface, parking location information is displayed.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在检测到所述目标车辆71处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息和所述目标车辆的参考位置信息,所述定位指示信息用于指示正在定位目标车辆的停放位置信息。When it is detected that the target vehicle 71 is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle are displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, and the positioning indication information is used to indicate that the parking position information of the target vehicle is being positioned.
  5. 根据权利要求2至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述在车辆定位界面显示定位指示信息和所述目标车辆的参考位置信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 4, characterized in that the displaying of the positioning indication information and the reference position information of the target vehicle on the vehicle positioning interface comprises:
    在所述车辆定位界面,显示所述定位指示信息和地图信息,所述地图信息对应的地域范围包括所述目标车辆的参考位置信息,在所述地图信息上采用预置标识标记所述参考位置信息;On the vehicle positioning interface, the positioning indication information and map information are displayed, the geographical range corresponding to the map information includes the reference position information of the target vehicle, and the reference position information is marked on the map information with a preset mark;
    其中,所述目标车辆的参考位置信息包括以下任一项:根据所述目标车辆的第二位置的定位信息和车辆行驶姿态数据,得到的推定位置信息;或者,以所述推定位置信息对应的位置为中心,与预置偏差范围为半径,确定的第一范围位置信息;或者,以所述第二位置为中心,以第二预置偏差范围为半径,确定的第二范围位置信息;The reference position information of the target vehicle includes any one of the following: estimated position information obtained based on the positioning information of the second position of the target vehicle and the vehicle driving posture data; or first range position information determined with the position corresponding to the estimated position information as the center and a preset deviation range as the radius; or second range position information determined with the second position as the center and a second preset deviation range as the radius;
    所述车辆行驶姿态数据包括所述目标车辆采用所述预设定位技术无法获得停放位置信息后获取的行驶姿态数据,所述第二位置为所述电子设备采用所述预设定位技术最后定位的位置。The vehicle driving posture data includes driving posture data obtained after the target vehicle fails to obtain parking position information using the preset positioning technology, and the second position is the position last located by the electronic device using the preset positioning technology.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在检测到所述目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息,并且检测到所述电子设备离开所述目标车辆的情况下,获取所述电子设备的行走姿态数据。When it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, and when it is detected that the electronic device leaves the target vehicle, the walking posture data of the electronic device is acquired.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述检测到所述电路设备离开所述目标车辆,包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 6, characterized in that the detecting that the circuit device leaves the target vehicle comprises at least one of the following:
    检测到与所述目标车辆的连接由连接状态变化为切断状态;detecting that the connection with the target vehicle changes from a connected state to a disconnected state;
    或者,接收到预置传感信息,所述传感信息用于指示所述目标车辆上的用户安全带从佩戴状态转变为解开状态;Alternatively, preset sensor information is received, the sensor information being used to indicate that a seat belt of a user on the target vehicle is changed from a wearing state to an unfastening state;
    或者,检测到所述行走姿态数据包括初始姿态数据和指示姿态数据;Alternatively, it is detected that the walking posture data includes initial posture data and indicated posture data;
    其中,所述初始姿态数据是指与第一时间段对应的行走姿态数据,所述第一时间段的开始时刻为检测到目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的时刻;所述指示姿态数据与所述初始姿态数据的差异值大于第一预置阈值。Among them, the initial posture data refers to the walking posture data corresponding to the first time period, the starting time of the first time period is the time when the target vehicle is detected to be in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained; the difference value between the indicated posture data and the initial posture data is greater than a first preset threshold.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取所述电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that the step of obtaining target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device comprises:
    如果检测到所述电子设备离开所述目标车辆,则经过预设延迟时间之后,获取所述电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息。If it is detected that the electronic device leaves the target vehicle, then after a preset delay time, the target positioning information corresponding to the first position of the electronic device during its movement is obtained.
  9. 根据权利要求2至8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取所述电子设备的行走姿态数据之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 8, characterized in that after acquiring the walking posture data of the electronic device, the method further comprises:
    根据所述电子设备的行走姿态数据,在所述车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径,所述第一行走路径以所述参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向所述电子设备的行走方向延伸; Displaying a first walking path on the vehicle positioning interface according to the walking posture data of the electronic device, wherein the first walking path starts from the position indicated by the reference position information and extends toward the walking direction of the electronic device;
    在所述获取第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,在所述车辆定位界面显示所述第一位置的目标定位信息。After acquiring the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the target positioning information of the first position is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  10. 根据权利要求2至9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取所述电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 9, characterized in that after acquiring the target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device, the method further comprises:
    根据所述行走姿态数据,以及所述目标定位信息,在所述车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径,所述第二行走路径以所述目标定位信息为终点并向所述电子设备的行走方向的相反方向延伸。According to the walking posture data and the target positioning information, a second walking path is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在所述电子设备移动过程中,根据所述行走姿态数据确定所述电子设备的行走过程轨迹;During the movement of the electronic device, determining a walking trajectory of the electronic device according to the walking posture data;
    所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息,包括:The step of obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position includes:
    将所述第一位置作为所述行走过程轨迹的终点位置,确定所述行走过程轨迹的起点位置,所述起点位置即为所述目标车辆的停放位置信息。The first position is used as the end position of the walking process trajectory, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined. The starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  12. 根据权利要求1至10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在检测到所述目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取所述电子设备的地磁序列数据;When it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, acquiring geomagnetic sequence data of the electronic device;
    在所述电子设备移动过程中,根据所述行走姿态数据和所述地磁序列数据,确定所述电子设备的行走过程轨迹;During the movement of the electronic device, determining a walking trajectory of the electronic device according to the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data;
    所述获取所述电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,包括:The acquiring target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device includes:
    采用预设定位技术,获取所述电子设备移动过程中第一位置对应的目标定位信息,其中,所述预设定位技术至少包括地磁匹配技术;Using a preset positioning technology to obtain target positioning information corresponding to the first position during the movement of the electronic device, wherein the preset positioning technology at least includes geomagnetic matching technology;
    所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息,包括:The step of obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position includes:
    将所述第一位置作为所述行走过程轨迹的终点位置,确定所述行走过程轨迹的起点位置,所述起点位置即为所述目标车辆的停放位置信息。The first position is used as the end position of the walking process trajectory, and the starting position of the walking process trajectory is determined. The starting position is the parking position information of the target vehicle.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述车辆定位界面显示第一行走路径的情况下,所述第一行走路径是通过所述行走过程轨迹表示的设备移动参数得到的,所述第一行走路径以所述参考位置信息表示的位置为起点并向所述电子设备的行走方向延伸,所述设备移动参数包括行走方向和行走速度。The method according to claim 11 or 12 is characterized in that, when the vehicle positioning interface displays a first walking path, the first walking path is obtained by the device movement parameters represented by the walking process trajectory, and the first walking path starts from the position represented by the reference position information and extends to the walking direction of the electronic device, and the device movement parameters include walking direction and walking speed.
  14. 根据权利要求1至10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10 is characterized in that obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position comprises:
    在获取所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息和所述行走姿态数据,确定所述电子设备移动至所述第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定所述电子设备移动的起点位置,所述起点位置即为所述目标车辆的停放位置。After acquiring the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position is determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position and the walking posture data, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  15. 根据权利要求1至10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在检测到所述目标车辆处于停放状态且无法获得停放位置信息的情况下,获取所述电子设备的地磁序列数据;When it is detected that the target vehicle is in a parked state and the parking position information cannot be obtained, acquiring geomagnetic sequence data of the electronic device;
    所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息,包括:The step of obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position includes:
    在获取所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息之后,根据所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息、所述行走姿态数据和所述地磁序列数据,确定所述电子设备移动至所述第一位置之前的轨迹位置,直至确定所述电子设备移动的起点位置,所述起点位置即为所述目标车辆的停放位置。After acquiring the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the trajectory position of the electronic device before it moves to the first position is determined according to the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the walking posture data and the geomagnetic sequence data, until the starting position of the electronic device is determined, and the starting position is the parking position of the target vehicle.
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述车辆定位界面显示第二行走路径的情况下,所述第二行走路径包括所述轨迹位置,所述第二行走路径以所述目标定位信息为终点并向所述电子设备的行走方向的相反方向延伸。The method according to claim 14 or 15 is characterized in that, when the vehicle positioning interface displays a second walking path, the second walking path includes the track position, and the second walking path ends at the target positioning information and extends in the opposite direction of the walking direction of the electronic device.
  17. 根据权利要求1至16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 16, characterized in that after obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position, the method further comprises:
    获取所述电子设备离开所述第一位置后的行走姿态数据; Acquire walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position;
    获取第三位置对应的校正定位信息,所述第三位置为所述电子设备离开所述第一位置后经过预置距离到达定位的位置;Acquire corrected positioning information corresponding to a third position, where the third position is a position where the electronic device reaches the position after leaving the first position and traveling a preset distance;
    以所述目标定位信息为起始位置,以所述校正定位信息为终止位置,校正所述电子设备离开所述第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数;Taking the target positioning information as the starting position and the corrected positioning information as the ending position, correcting the walking posture data of the electronic device after it leaves the first position, and acquiring correction compensation parameters;
    根据所述校正补偿参数,校正并更新所述行走姿态数据;Correcting and updating the walking posture data according to the correction compensation parameters;
    根据所述更新后的所述行走姿态数据,以及所述目标定位信息,获取更新后的停放位置信息;Acquire updated parking position information according to the updated walking posture data and the target positioning information;
    在所述车辆定位界面,显示所述更新后的停放位置信息。The updated parking location information is displayed on the vehicle positioning interface.
  18. 根据权利要求1至16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述第一位置对应的目标定位信息,获得所述目标车辆的停放位置信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 16, characterized in that the step of obtaining the parking position information of the target vehicle according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information corresponding to the first position comprises:
    获取所述电子设备离开所述第一位置后的行走姿态数据;Acquire walking posture data of the electronic device after leaving the first position;
    获取第三位置对应的校正定位信息,所述第三位置为所述电子设备离开所述第一位置后经过预置距离到达定位的位置;Acquire corrected positioning information corresponding to a third position, where the third position is a position where the electronic device reaches the position after leaving the first position and traveling a preset distance;
    以所述目标定位信息为起始位置,以所述校正定位信息为终止位置,校正所述电子设备离开所述第一位置后的行走姿态数据,获取校正补偿参数;Taking the target positioning information as the starting position and the corrected positioning information as the ending position, correcting the walking posture data of the electronic device after it leaves the first position, and acquiring correction compensation parameters;
    根据所述校正补偿参数,校正并更新所述用户离车后的行走姿态数据;Correcting and updating the walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle according to the correction compensation parameters;
    根据所述更新后的所述用户离车后的行走姿态数据,以及所述目标定位信息,获取停放位置信息。The parking position information is obtained according to the updated walking posture data of the user after leaving the vehicle and the target positioning information.
  19. 根据权利要求1至18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述行走姿态数据和所述目标定位信息,获得停放位置信息之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 18, characterized in that after obtaining the parking position information according to the walking posture data and the target positioning information, the method further comprises:
    响应于用户的车辆寻找请求,以所述停放位置信息为目标位置,以当前实时定位位置为起始位置,生成导航路径。In response to a vehicle search request from a user, a navigation path is generated with the parking location information as a target location and the current real-time positioning location as a starting location.
  20. 根据权利要求1至19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述预设定位技术包括以下至少一项:卫星定位技术、无线网络通信Wi-Fi技术、移动通信网络技术、蓝牙通信技术和地磁匹配技术。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 19 is characterized in that the preset positioning technology includes at least one of the following: satellite positioning technology, wireless network communication Wi-Fi technology, mobile communication network technology, Bluetooth communication technology and geomagnetic matching technology.
  21. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括:存储器、一个或多个处理器;所述存储器与所述处理器耦合;其中,所述存储器中存储有计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-20任一项所述的车辆定位方法。An electronic device, characterized in that it includes: a memory and one or more processors; the memory is coupled to the processor; wherein computer program code is stored in the memory, and the computer program code includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed by the processor, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method as described in any one of claims 1-20.
  22. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-20任一项所述的车辆定位方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that it includes computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the vehicle positioning method as described in any one of claims 1-20.
  23. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-20任一项所述的车辆定位方法。 A computer program product, characterized in that when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is enabled to execute the vehicle positioning method as described in any one of claims 1 to 20.
PCT/CN2023/118393 2022-09-30 2023-09-12 Vehicle positioning method and electronic device WO2024067078A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211214580.5 2022-09-30
CN202211214580.5A CN117809463A (en) 2022-09-30 2022-09-30 Vehicle positioning method and electronic equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024067078A1 true WO2024067078A1 (en) 2024-04-04

Family

ID=90424147

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/118393 WO2024067078A1 (en) 2022-09-30 2023-09-12 Vehicle positioning method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117809463A (en)
WO (1) WO2024067078A1 (en)

Citations (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20090087300A (en) * 2008-02-12 2009-08-17 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for map-matching of the pedestrian navigation system using dead reckoning
US20100318293A1 (en) * 2009-06-12 2010-12-16 Microsoft Corporation Retracing steps
EP2474943A1 (en) * 2011-01-10 2012-07-11 Deutsche Telekom AG Mobile device-based automatic parking location recorder and reminder using on-board diagnostics
CN103810898A (en) * 2012-11-15 2014-05-21 深圳市赛格导航科技股份有限公司 Automatic parking and picking system and method
US20140232569A1 (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-08-21 Apple Inc. Automatic identification of vehicle location
US20140232570A1 (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-08-21 Apple Inc. Vehicle location in weak location signal scenarios
CN104575079A (en) * 2014-08-12 2015-04-29 深圳市旺龙软件技术有限公司 Vehicle positioning method and vehicle finding method in parking lot
US20150193729A1 (en) * 2014-01-09 2015-07-09 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Inventory tracking system classification strategy
CN105468337A (en) * 2014-06-16 2016-04-06 比亚迪股份有限公司 Method and system for seeking vehicle through mobile terminal and mobile terminal
CN105594267A (en) * 2013-10-31 2016-05-18 英特尔公司 Virtual breadcrumbs for indoor location wayfinding
CN105989732A (en) * 2015-02-27 2016-10-05 昆山研达电脑科技有限公司 Parking position search device and method
CN106169247A (en) * 2016-08-04 2016-11-30 上海交通大学 The garage parking indoor positioning of view-based access control model and map and micro navigation system and method
CN106297367A (en) * 2016-08-29 2017-01-04 河海大学常州校区 A kind of underground parking lot vehicle-searching method and device
CN106485934A (en) * 2015-08-25 2017-03-08 库天下(北京)信息技术有限公司 A kind of reverse navigation looks for the method and device of target vehicle
CN107154164A (en) * 2017-07-13 2017-09-12 浦信科技(上海)有限公司 A kind of parking lot reverse car seeking method and system
CN110766964A (en) * 2019-11-08 2020-02-07 武汉楚进科技有限公司 Underground garage vehicle finding method and mobile terminal
CN111368765A (en) * 2020-03-09 2020-07-03 华为技术有限公司 Vehicle position determining method and device, electronic equipment and vehicle-mounted equipment
CN113436461A (en) * 2021-05-31 2021-09-24 荣耀终端有限公司 Method for sending parking space information, vehicle-mounted device and computer-readable storage medium
KR20220069748A (en) * 2020-11-20 2022-05-27 (주)수지원넷소프트 Method for automatically identifying the floor where a vehicle is parked and an apparatus for said method

Patent Citations (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20090087300A (en) * 2008-02-12 2009-08-17 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for map-matching of the pedestrian navigation system using dead reckoning
US20100318293A1 (en) * 2009-06-12 2010-12-16 Microsoft Corporation Retracing steps
EP2474943A1 (en) * 2011-01-10 2012-07-11 Deutsche Telekom AG Mobile device-based automatic parking location recorder and reminder using on-board diagnostics
CN103810898A (en) * 2012-11-15 2014-05-21 深圳市赛格导航科技股份有限公司 Automatic parking and picking system and method
US20140232569A1 (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-08-21 Apple Inc. Automatic identification of vehicle location
US20140232570A1 (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-08-21 Apple Inc. Vehicle location in weak location signal scenarios
WO2014130194A1 (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-08-28 Apple Inc. Automatic identification of vehicle location
CN105594267A (en) * 2013-10-31 2016-05-18 英特尔公司 Virtual breadcrumbs for indoor location wayfinding
US20150193729A1 (en) * 2014-01-09 2015-07-09 Ford Global Technologies, Llc Inventory tracking system classification strategy
CN105468337A (en) * 2014-06-16 2016-04-06 比亚迪股份有限公司 Method and system for seeking vehicle through mobile terminal and mobile terminal
CN104575079A (en) * 2014-08-12 2015-04-29 深圳市旺龙软件技术有限公司 Vehicle positioning method and vehicle finding method in parking lot
CN105989732A (en) * 2015-02-27 2016-10-05 昆山研达电脑科技有限公司 Parking position search device and method
CN106485934A (en) * 2015-08-25 2017-03-08 库天下(北京)信息技术有限公司 A kind of reverse navigation looks for the method and device of target vehicle
CN106169247A (en) * 2016-08-04 2016-11-30 上海交通大学 The garage parking indoor positioning of view-based access control model and map and micro navigation system and method
CN106297367A (en) * 2016-08-29 2017-01-04 河海大学常州校区 A kind of underground parking lot vehicle-searching method and device
CN107154164A (en) * 2017-07-13 2017-09-12 浦信科技(上海)有限公司 A kind of parking lot reverse car seeking method and system
CN110766964A (en) * 2019-11-08 2020-02-07 武汉楚进科技有限公司 Underground garage vehicle finding method and mobile terminal
CN111368765A (en) * 2020-03-09 2020-07-03 华为技术有限公司 Vehicle position determining method and device, electronic equipment and vehicle-mounted equipment
KR20220069748A (en) * 2020-11-20 2022-05-27 (주)수지원넷소프트 Method for automatically identifying the floor where a vehicle is parked and an apparatus for said method
CN113436461A (en) * 2021-05-31 2021-09-24 荣耀终端有限公司 Method for sending parking space information, vehicle-mounted device and computer-readable storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117809463A (en) 2024-04-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11721098B2 (en) Augmented reality interface for facilitating identification of arriving vehicle
CN108237918B (en) Vehicle and control method thereof
US9188451B2 (en) Method and apparatus for minimizing power consumption in a navigation system
CN105594267B (en) The virtual crumbs searched for indoor location road
CN111524381B (en) Parking position pushing method, device and system and electronic equipment
US11064322B2 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for detecting joint motion
US11029414B2 (en) Electronic devices and methods for providing location information
WO2016110049A1 (en) Prompting method and device for vehicle parking position
WO2023010922A1 (en) Overpass identification method and apparatus
CN110809706A (en) Providing street level images related to ride services in a navigation application
WO2023010923A1 (en) Overpass identification method and apparatus
US20230379408A1 (en) Positioning Method and Electronic Device
US20190212152A1 (en) Measurement data processing
WO2024067078A1 (en) Vehicle positioning method and electronic device
CN117128959A (en) Car searching navigation method, electronic equipment, server and system
CN113739784A (en) Positioning method, user equipment, storage medium and electronic equipment
CN116709501A (en) Service scene identification method, electronic equipment and storage medium
US9692867B2 (en) Event accessory item location
CN114136308B (en) Navigation method, electronic device and storage medium
CN115550843B (en) Positioning method and related equipment
EP3528010A1 (en) Electronic device, control device, control program and operation method of electronic device
CN116844375B (en) Parking information display method and electronic equipment
JP6777743B2 (en) Electronic devices, control programs and operating methods of electronic devices
US20220329971A1 (en) Determining context categorizations based on audio samples
CN118072544A (en) Map generation method and terminal equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23870315

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1